Type 8098
FLOWave L

SAW Flowmeter

Operating Instructions
Software version A.05.00.00 and higherWe reserve the right to make technical changes without notice.
© Bürkert SAS, 2015 – 2023
Operating Instructions 2303/09_EU-EN 00567647 / Original EN

Type 8098 FLOWave L
General contents﻿

GENERAL INFORMATION................................................................................................................................5
DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................................................................13
TECHNICAL DATA...........................................................................................................................................21
INSTALLATION IN THE PIPE..........................................................................................................................37
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................53
COMMISSIONING ..........................................................................................................................................75
DOING THE SETTINGS...................................................................................................................................81
MENU DISPLAY .............................................................................................................................................99
MENU GENERAL SETTINGS .......................................................................................................................107
MENU SAW SENSOR – PARAMETER ........................................................................................................147
MENU SAW SENSOR – DIAGNOSTICS ......................................................................................................243
MENU SAW SENSOR – MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................................249
MENU OUTPUTS .........................................................................................................................................279
MENU INDUSTRIAL COMMUNICATION .....................................................................................................297
TROUBLESHOOTING, MAINTENANCE, TRANSPORT, STORAGE...........................................................309
APPENDIX.....................................................................................................................................................341

3

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
﻿General contents

4englishType 8098 FLOWave L﻿General information
1

2

THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ........................................................................................................6
1.1

Symbols used ...............................................................................................................................6

1.2

Definition of the term device........................................................................................................6

1.3

Definition of the term büS.............................................................................................................7

1.4

Validity of the Operating Instructions...........................................................................................7

INTENDED USE.......................................................................................................................................8
2.1

Device with ATEX / IECEx certification........................................................................................83

BASIC SAFETY INFORMATION..............................................................................................................94

GENERAL INFORMATION.....................................................................................................................11
4.1

Manufacturer's address and international contacts.................................................................11

4.2

Warranty conditions....................................................................................................................11

4.3

Information on the Internet.........................................................................................................115

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
The Operating Instructions

1

THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONSThe Operating Instructions describe the entire life cycle of the device. Please keep the Operating Instructions in a safe place, accessible to all users and any new owners.
The Operating Instructions contain important safety information.
Failure to comply with these instructions can lead to hazardous situations. Pay attention in particular tothe chapters 3 Basic safety information and 2 Intended use.
▶ Irrespective of the device variant, the Operating Instructions must be read and understood.

1.1

Symbols used
DANGER

Warns against an imminent danger.
▶ Failure to observe this warning results in death or in serious injury.

WARNING
Warns against a potentially dangerous situation.
▶ Failure to observe this warning can result in serious injury or even death.

CAUTIONWarns against a possible risk.
▶ Failure to observe this warning can result in substantial or minor injuries.

NOTICE
Warns against material damage.
Indicates additional information, advice or important recommendations.

Refers to information contained in these Operating Instructions or in other documents.
▶ Indicates an instruction to be carried out to avoid a danger, a warning or a possible risk.

→ Indicates a work step which you must carry out.
A highlighted term is related to a menu or a menu item.
Indicates the result of a specific instruction.

1.2

Definition of the term device

The term "device" used in these Operating Instructions always refers to the Type 8098 FLOWave L
flowmeter.

6

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
The Operating Instructions

1.3

Definition of the term büS

The term "büS" used in these Operating Instructions refers to the industrial communication, developed by
Bürkert, based on the CANopen protocol. The term "büS" refers to the Bürkert system bus.

→ For more information on büS, read the cabling guide available in English and in Japanese (Cabling_
guide_for_büS/EDIP.pdf) at country.burkert.com.

→ For more information on CANopen which is related to the device, refer to the Operating Instructions"CANopen Network configuration" at country.burkert.com.

1.4

Validity of the Operating Instructions

The Operating Instructions are valid for the devices from software version A.04.00.00.
To read out the version number of the device software, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→Device information→

Software version→

Go back to the parent menu.

7englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Intended use

2

INTENDED USE

Use of the device that does not comply with the instructions could present risks to people, nearby
installations and the environment.
The Type 8098 FLOWave L flowmeter uses the Surface Acoustic Wave (SAW) measurement principle
and is intended to measure the flow rate of liquids that have all the following characteristics:− clean liquids− non emulsified liquids (homogeneous liquids)− liquids that are free of air bubbles− liquids that are free of gas bubbles− liquids that are free of solids.
▶ The device is not intended to measure the flow rate of liquids if gas bubbles are present, whatever theorigin of the bubbles (air intake, cavitation, degassing…).
▶ Use the device in compliance with the characteristics and the conditions of commissioning and use
specified in the contractual documents and in the Operating Instructions.
▶ Protect the device against electromagnetic interference, ultraviolet rays and, when installed outdoors,against the effects of climatic conditions.
▶ Only operate a device in perfect working order.
▶ Properly transport, store, install and operate the device.
▶ Only use the device as intended.

2.1

Device with ATEX / IECEx certification
DANGER

Risk of explosion in the event of improper use of the device in potentially explosive areas.
▶ Observe the specifications of the ATEX / IECEx-conformity certificate.
▶ Observe the specifications given in the ATEX / IECEx supplement for Type 8098 FLOWave L. The supplement is available at country.burkert.com
The ATEX / IECEx certification is only valid if the device is used as described in the ATEX / IECEx supplement.
If unauthorized changes are made to the device, then the ATEX / IECEx certification becomes invalid.

8

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Basic safety information

3

BASIC SAFETY INFORMATIONThis safety information does not take into account any contingencies or occurrences that may arise during
installation, use and maintenance of the device.
The operating company is responsible for the respect of the local safety regulations, including staff safety.

Risk of injury due to electrical voltage.
▶ Before carrying out work on the system, disconnect the electrical power for all the conductors and isolate it.
▶ In accordance with standard UL/EN 61010-1, all equipment connected to the Type 8098 FLOWave L
flowmeter shall be double insulated with respect to the mains and all circuits connected to theType 8098 FLOWave L flowmeter must be limited energy circuits.
▶ Observe all applicable accident protection and safety regulations for electrical equipment.
Risk of injury due to pressure in the installation.
▶ Before any intervention in the installation, stop the circulation of liquid, cut off the pressure and drain thepipe.
▶ Before any intervention in the installation, make sure there is no pressure in the pipe.
▶ Observe the dependency between the liquid temperature and the liquid pressure for the fitting used.
If switched on for a prolonged time, risk of burns or fire due to hot device surfaces▶ Do not touch with bare hands.
▶ Keep the device away from highly flammable substances and liquids.
Risk of burns due to high liquid temperatures.
▶ Do not touch with bare hands the parts of the device that are in contact with the liquid.
▶ Use safety gloves to handle the device.
▶ Before opening the pipe, stop the circulation of liquid and drain the pipe.
▶ Before opening the pipe, make sure the pipe is completely empty.
Risk of injury due to the nature of the liquid.
▶ Respect the prevailing regulations on accident prevention and safety relating to the use of dangerous
liquids.

9

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Basic safety information

General dangerous situations
To avoid injury, obey the following instructions:▶ Do not use the device in explosive atmospheres.1)▶ Do not use the device in an environment incompatible with the device materials.
▶ Do not use liquid that is incompatible with the device materials. Find the compatibility chart on our
homepage: country.burkert.com.
▶ Do not subject the device to mechanical loads.
▶ Do not make any modifications to the device.
▶ Prevent any unintentional power supply switch-on.
▶ Only qualified and skilled staff may carry out installation and maintenance work.
▶ Ensure a defined or controlled restarting of the process after a power supply interruption.
▶ Observe the general technical rules.
1) only applicable for devices without ATEX / IECEx certification

CAUTION
Risk of injury due to a heavy device.
A heavy device can fall down during transport or during installation and cause injuries.
▶ Transport, install and dismantle a heavy device with the help of another person.
▶ Use appropriate tools.

NOTICE
Elements and components sensitive to electrostatic discharges▶ This device contains electronic components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharges. They may bedamaged if they are touched by an electrostatically charged person or object. In the worst case scenario, these components are instantly destroyed or disabled as soon as they are activated.
▶ To minimise or even avoid any damage caused by an electrostatic discharge, take all the precautions
described in standard EN 61340-5-1.
▶ Also make sure that you do not touch any of the live electrical components.

10

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General information

4

GENERAL INFORMATION

4.1

Manufacturer's address and international contacts

To contact the manufacturer of the device, use the following address:
Bürkert SAS
Rue du Giessen
BP 21
F-67220 TRIEMBACH-AU-VAL
You may also contact your local Bürkert sales office.
The addresses of our international sales offices are available on the internet at: country.burkert.com

4.2

Warranty conditions

The condition governing the legal warranty is the conforming use of the device in observance of the operating conditions specified in the Operating Instructions.

4.3

Information on the Internet

You can find the operating instructions and the technical data sheets for Type 8098 FLOWave L at:country.burkert.com

11

englishType 8098 FLOWave L﻿12englishType 8098 FLOWave L﻿Description
5

DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................................................................14
5.1

Device variants............................................................................................................................14

5.2

Wi-Fi module...............................................................................................................................16

5.3

Unlocking magnetic key.............................................................................................................16

5.4

Type labels..................................................................................................................................175.4.1

Adhesive labels...........................................................................................................17

5.4.2

Laser marking.............................................................................................................19

5.5

Marking with the MAC address..................................................................................................19

5.6

Certification markings.................................................................................................................19

5.7

Marking of the Unique Serial Number (USN).............................................................................19

5.8

Device status indicator ..............................................................................................................20

13

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Description

5

DESCRIPTION

5.1

Device variants

The Type 8098 FLOWave L flowmeter is made up of a transmitter and a Type S097 flow sensor.
The following pictures describe the main device variants of the Type 8098 FLOWave L flowmeter:• Fig. 1 describes a device with two M20x1.5 cable glands in stainless steel (or in nickel plated brass) andone 5-pin M12 male connector.
• Fig. 2 describes the Ethernet device variant, i.e. a device with two 4-pin M12 female connectors and one
5-pin M12 male connector.
Blind coveror display module (Type ME31)

Type 8098 FLOWave L flowmeter

Device status indicator, seal

Transmitter housing, including
the electronic modules
Transmitter

M20x1.5 cable glands in nickel
plated brass, with blind plugs

or M20x1.5 cable glands instainless steel, with blind plugs
Seal

5-pin M12 male connector, withscrewed plug

Functional earth
Type S097 flow
sensorSeal

Blind cover

Process connection 1)

Pressure compensating
element2)

Sensor housing

Sensor measurement tube

The process connections can be either clamp connections, flange connections or external-threaded connections.

Fig. 1:

Description of the device variants with two M20x1.5 cable glands and one 5-pin M12 male connector

14

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Description

Blind coveror display module (Type ME31)

Device status indicator, sealType 8098 FLOWave L flowmeter

Housing, including the electronic modules
TransmitterSeal

4-pin M12 female connectors
with screwed plugs
5-pin M12 male connector, withscrewed plug

Functional earth

Blind cover

Seal

Process connection 1)
Type S097 flow
sensorSensor measurement tube

Pressure compensating
element
1)

Sensor housing

The process connections can be either clamp connections, flange connections or external-threaded connections

Fig. 2:

Description of an Ethernet device variant, with two 4-pin M12 female connectors and one 5-pin M12 maleconnector

15

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Description

5.2

Wi-Fi module

The device can be equipped with a Wi-Fi module in place of or in addition to the display module. The
Wi-Fi module has the Type number ME31. The Wi-Fi module has the same functional scope as the display
module.
The Wi-Fi module is intended for use in Europe, the USA, and Canada.
The module can be integrated into an existing WLAN infrastructure. The wireless range is approximately
10 m.
The module provides a web server which can be accessed if the following requirements are met:
• Windows 7/8.1/10: IE11, Edge, Google Chrome, from version 53.
• Android with Google: Chrome, from version 53.
• Apple: Safari, from iOS 9.3.5.

→ For more informations about the Wi-Fi module, refer to the Software manual ME31 | WLAN module,
available at country.burkert.com.

5.3

Unlocking magnetic key

The device is delivered with a magnetic key to unlock the display module, the Wi-Fi module or the blind
cover. See Fig. 3.

Fig. 3:

Unlocking magnetic key

The device operates on a 4-wire system and needs a 12...35 V DC power supply.
The device has three electrical outputs:• 1 analogue output,• 1 digital output,• 1 output, which can be configured as an analogue output or as a digital output.
These 3 outputs are not available on the Ethernet variant.

16

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Description

5.4

Type labels

5.4.1

Adhesive labels

F-67220 Triembach

1

2

3

8098 FLOWave L
Supply: 12-35
5W Max.
IP65 / IP67 / NEMA4X
Ambient Temp : -10 to 70°C

88888888

4
5

CAN_H GND
4 3
SN 9999
5
CAN_L
1 2
V+
CAN shield

W49MN

Made in France

28-06

12

11

10

9

6
7

8

1. Supply voltage

8. Serial number

2. Type of the device

9. Conformity marking

3. Power consumption

10.Article number

4. IP-Code, NEMA protection type

11.Warning: Before using the device, take into
account the technical specifications given in the
Operating Instructions.

5. Ambient temperature range

6. Pin assignment of the 5-pin M12 male connector 12.Certification
7. Manufacturing code
Fig. 4:

Type label, Type 8098 FLOWave L flowmeter (example of a UL device)

17

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Description

12F-67220 Triembach

8098 FLOWave L
IP65 / IP67 / NEMA 4X
Ambient temp.: -10 to 55°C

388888888 SN 9999
CAN_H GND
4 3
5
CAN_L
1 2
V+
CAN shield

W49MN

Made in France

28-06

10

9

8

7

4
5

6

1. IP-Code, NEMA protection type

7. Conformity marking

2. Type of the device

8. Article number

3. Ambient temperature range

9. Warning: Before using the device, take into
account the technical specifications given in the
4. Pin assignment of the 5-pin M12 male connector
Operating Instructions.
5. Manufacturing code

10.Certification

6. Serial number
Fig. 5:

Type label, Type 8098 FLOWave L flowmeter (example of a non-UL Ethernet device)

F-67220 Triembach

1
S097 FLOWave Flow sensor
Pipe: 316L/1.4435 Housing: 304/1.4301
DIN 11866 C / Clamp D50.5 DIN 32676 B DN15
PN25bar Max. flow:10 m3/h
Temp. medium : -20 to 110°C

2
3
4
5

W4ZMN

6

Made in France

7

1. Type of the flow sensor
2. Material of the pipe, material of the housing
3. Standard the pipe conforms to; type of process connection, external diameter of the clamp and standard
the process connection conforms to; DN of the measurement tube
4. Pressure class of the device and maximum flow rate
5. Liquid temperature range
6. Manufacturing code
7. Conformity marking
Fig. 6:

Type label, Type S097 flow sensor (example)

18

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Description

5.4.2

Laser marking
11

1
2
3

4

10

Supply: 12...35V 5W Max.
IP65 | IP67 | NEMA4X
Ambient Temp: -10°...+70°C

1213

Type: 8098 FLOWave L
ID:00xxxxxx | S/N:001234
W49MN

Slot5:
Slot4:
Slot3:
Slot2:
Slot1:

928-06

Measuring
Equipment
N°E237737

CRN 0C21751.5

5

6 7

1. Type of the device

8

2. Article number | Serial number

8. Warning: Before using the device, take into
account the technical specifications given in the
Operating Instructions.

3. Manufacturing code

9. Certifications

4. Canadian Registration Number (CRN)

10. Power consumption

5. Conformity marking

11. Operating voltage

6. Electronic modules

12. IP-Codes, NEMA protection type

7. Supported protocols, Ethernet device variant

13. Ambient temperature range

Fig. 7:

Laser marking, Type 8098 FLOWave L flowmeter (example of a UL Ethernet device)

5.5

Marking with the MAC address

The marking with the MAC address can be seen by opening the front of the transmitter.

→ To open the front of the transmitter, see chapter 8.9 on page 61.
DC-B0-58-FF-FF-FF

Fig. 8:Marking with the MAC address of the device (example)

5.6

Certification markings

Certification markings are either located on the Type label of the measuring device or on separate labels.

5.7

Marking of the Unique Serial Number (USN)The USN is marked on the side of the sensor. The USN is built with the device article number and thedevice serial number.
19

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Description

5.8

Device status indicator

The device status indicator changes its colour based on the NAMUR NE 107 recommendation.
The color of the device status indicator gives the following pieces of information:• Whether device diagnostics are active on not.
• If device diagnostics are active, then the device status indicator shows whether diagnostics events havebeen generated or not. If several diagnostics events have been generated, then the device status indicatorshows the diagnostics event with the highest priority. Refer to Table 1
If the device status indicator flashes, then the device is selected in a man-machine interface such as the
Bürkert Communicator software.
Table 1:

Device status indicator in accordance with NAMUR NE 107, edition 2006-06-12

Colouraccording to
NE 107
Red

Colour code(for a PLC)

Orange4

Yellow

3

5

Diagnostics event
according to
NE 107
Failure, error or
fault
Check function

Meaning

Due to a malfunction of the device or its periphery,
the measured values can be incorrect.
Ongoing work on the device (for example, checking
the correct behaviour of the outputs by simulating
measurement values); the output signal is temporarily
invalid (e.g. frozen).
Out of specification The ambient conditions or process conditions for thedevice are outside the permitted ranges.
Device-internal diagnostics point to problems in thedevice or with the process properties.
The device continues to measure but a function is
temporarily restricted.

Blue

2

Maintenancerequired

Green

1

-

→ Do the required maintenance operation.
Diagnostics are active and no diagnostics event has
been generated.

White

0

-

Diagnostics are inactive.

20

englishType 8098 FLOWave L﻿Technical data
6

TECHNICAL DATA.................................................................................................................................22
6.1

Operating conditions..................................................................................................................22

6.2

Standards and directives............................................................................................................23
6.2.1

Conformity to the Pressure Equipment Directive......................................................23

6.2.2

UL certification...........................................................................................................23

6.2.3

EHEDG certification....................................................................................................24

6.2.4

ATEX / IECEx certification .........................................................................................24

6.3

Liquid data..................................................................................................................................25

6.4

Measurement data......................................................................................................................27
6.4.1

Volume flow rate.........................................................................................................27

6.4.2

Temperature................................................................................................................27

6.4.3

Differentiation factor...................................................................................................28

6.4.4

Acoustic transmission factor.....................................................................................28

6.4.5

Density........................................................................................................................28

6.4.6

Mass flow rate.............................................................................................................28

6.5

Electrical data ............................................................................................................................29

6.6

Mechanical data..........................................................................................................................31

6.7

Specifications of the Ethernet Industrial communication.........................................................32
6.7.1

Modbus TCP protocol................................................................................................32

6.7.2

PROFINET protocol....................................................................................................33

6.7.3

EtherNet/IP protocol...................................................................................................34

6.7.4

EtherCAT protocol......................................................................................................35

21

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Technical data

6

TECHNICAL DATA

6.1

Operating conditions

Ambient temperature

Depends on the liquid temperature (see Fig. 9 or Fig. 10)• Device variant with two
M20x1.5 cable glands andone 5-pin M12 connector• –10 °C...+70 °C, if the liquid temperature is –10 °C...+80 °C (see Fig. 9)• See Fig. 9, if the liquid temperature is higher than +80 °C• Device variant with two 4-pin • –10 °C...+55 °C (see Fig. 10)M12 female connectors andone 5-pin M12 connector(Ethernet device variant)
Air humidity< 85 %, non condensing

Height above see level
Operating conditions≤ 2000 m
Continuous operation

Equipment mobility

Fixed device

Use

Indoor and outdoor

Installation category▶ Protect the device against electromagnetic interference, ultraviolet rays
and, when installed outdoors, against the effects of climatic conditions.
Category I according to UL/EN 61010-1

Degree of pollution

Degree 2 according to UL/EN 61010-1

Protection class according to
IEC/EN 60529

IP651), IP671) if the following conditions are observed:• The device must be wired.
• The cable glands must be tightened.
• The covers must be screwed tight.
• Unused cable glands must be sealed with the blind plugs provided.
The blind plugs are mounted upon delivery of the device.
• Unused M12 connectors must be protected by a screwed plug.

Protection class according to
NEMA2501)

4X if the following conditions are observed:• The device must be wired.
• The cable glands must be tightened.
• The covers must be screwed tight.
• Unused cable glands must be sealed with the blind plugs provided.
The blind plugs are mounted upon delivery of the device.
• Unused M12 connectors must be protected by a screwed plug.

1) not evaluated by UL; only IP64 is evaluated by the ATEX / IECEx notified body

→ For the special operating conditions of devices with ATEX / IECEx certification, refer to the ATEX / IECEx
supplement for the device. The supplement is available at country.burkert.com.

22

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Technical data

6.2

Standards and directives

The device complies with the relevant EU harmonisation legislation. In addition, the device also complies
with the requirements of the laws of the United Kingdom.
The harmonised standards that have been applied for the conformity assessment procedure are listed in thecurrent version of the EU Declaration of Conformity/UK Declaration of Conformity.

6.2.1

Conformity to the Pressure Equipment Directive▶ Make sure that the device materials are compatible with the liquid.
▶ Make sure that the pipe DN is adapted for the device.
▶ Observe the liquid nominal pressure (PN) for the device. The nominal pressure (PN) is given by the device
manufacturer.
The device conforms to Article 4, Paragraph 1 of the Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU under thefollowing conditions:• Device used on a pipe (PS = maximum admissible pressure, in bar; DN = nominal dimension of the pipe)
Type of liquid

Conditions

Fluid group 1, Article 4, Paragraph 1.c.i

DN ≤ 25

Fluid group 2, Article 4, Paragraph 1.c.i
Fluid group 1, Article 4, Paragraph 1.c.ii

Fluid group 2, Article 4, Paragraph 1.c.ii

DN ≤ 32
or PSxDN ≤ 1000
DN ≤ 25or PSxDN ≤ 2000
DN ≤ 200
or PS ≤ 10
or PSxDN ≤ 5000

6.2.2

UL certification

The devices with variable key PU01 or PU02 are UL-certified devices and comply also with the following
standards:• UL 61010-1• CAN/CSA-C22.2 n°61010-1
Identification on the device®

Measuring
Equipment
E237737

Certification

Variable key

UL recognized

PU01

UL listed

PU02

23

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Technical data

6.2.3

EHEDG certification• EL class I• The following device variants are EHEDG certified:
Process connections

Diameters• Clamp 1) connections according to ASME BPE(DIN 32676 series C)• 3/8", 1/2", 3/4", 1", 1 1/2", 2", 2 1/2", 3"• Clamp connections according to DIN 11864-3
series C• 1/2", 3/4", 1", 1 1/2", 2"• Flange connections according to DIN 11864-2
series C• 1/2", 3/4", 1", 1 1/2", 2"• Clamp 1) connections according to
DIN 32676 series B• DN08, DN15 (except device variants with a clamp
diameter of 34.0 mm), DN25, DN40, DN50, DN65,
DN80• Clamp 1) connections according to
DIN 32676 series A• DN08, DN15, DN25, DN40, DN50, DN65, DN80

• Clamp connections according to DIN 11864-3
series A, DIN 11864-3 series B• DN08, DN15, DN25, DN40, DN50

• Clamp 1) connections according to SMS 3017 /ISO 2852 for pipes according to SMS 3008

• DN25, DN40, DN50

• Flange connections according to DIN 11864-2
series A, DIN 11864-2 series B• DN08, DN15, DN25, DN40, DN50, DN65, DN80

• External-threaded 2) connections according to
DIN 11851 series A• DN65, DN80

1) The EHEDG compliance is only valid if the connections are used in combination with EHEDG-compliant
gaskets from Combifit International B.V.
2) The EHEDG compliance is only valid if the connections are used in combination with EHEDG-compliant
gaskets:• ASEPTO-STAR k-flex upgrade gaskets from Kieselmann GmbH, Germany• SKS gaskets set DIN 11851 EHEDG with EPDM or FKM inner gasket from Siersema Komponenten
Service (S.K.S.) B.V., Netherlands→ To make sure you use EHEDG-compliant gaskets, refer to the "EHEDG Position Paper" available on the
EHEDG website.

The manufacturer of the device does not supply any gaskets for the process connections.

6.2.4

ATEX / IECEx certification→ Refer to the ATEX / IECEx supplement for the device. The supplement is available atcountry.burkert.com.

24

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Technical data

6.3

Liquid data
°C

Ambient temperature 70

60

40

Temperatures authorized
for a limited duration

20
0
-10
-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

120 140 °C

Liquid temperature
Fig. 9:Dependency between the liquid temperature and the ambient temperature, device variant with two
M20x1.5 cable glands and one 5-pin M12 male connector°C
70

Ambient temperature

55
40

Temperatures authorized
for a limited duration

20
0
-10
-20

0

20

40

60

80

100

120 140 °C

Liquid temperature
Fig. 10:Dependency between the liquid temperature and the ambient temperature, device variant with two 4-pin
M12 female connectors and one 5-pin M12 male connector (Ethernet device variant)Liquid temperature–20 °C...+110 °C. Up to 140 °C for maximum 60 minutes for asterilisation process.
Maximum temperature gradient: 10 °C/s [measured by the sensor
integrated in the device]

Type of liquids
Speed of sound in the liquid• DN08• 3/8", 1/2"
• from DN15 and above• from 3/4" and above

The maximum liquid temperature can be restricted by the ambient
operating temperature. Depending on the device variant, see Fig. 9 or
Fig. 10Non-dangerous liquids according to Article 4, Paragraph 1 of
Directive 2014/68/EU• 1000...2000 m/s• 800...2300 m/s
25englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Technical data

Table 2:Liquid pressure, depending on the pipe diameter, the type of process connections and the processconnection standard

Size of the processconnection

Type of processconnection
clamp

DN08, DN15, DN25

Standards the process connections
conform to• DIN 11864-3 series B• DIN 32676 series A

PN

PN25

• DIN 32676 series B
flangeDIN 11864-2 series B

PN25

clamp

DIN 11864-3 series A

PN25

flangeDIN 11864-2 series A

PN25

DN25

clamp

SMS 3017 / ISO 2852 for pipes
according to SMS 3008

PN25

3/8", 1/2", 3/4", 1", 1 1/2"

clamp

ASME BPE (DIN 32676 series C)

PN25

clamp

DIN 11864-3 series C

PN25

flangeDIN 11864-2 series C

PN25

DN15, DN25

1/2", 3/4", 1", 1 1/2"
• DIN 11864-3 series B

clamp
DN40

• DIN 32676 series B• DIN 11864-3 series A• DIN 32676 series A

PN16

PN25

• SMS 3017 / ISO 2852 for pipes
according to SMS 3008
DIN 11864-2 series B

PN16

DIN 11864-2 series A

PN25

flange• DIN 11864-3 series A• DIN 11864-3 series B
clamp• DIN 32676 series A

PN16• DIN 32676 series B

DN50

flangeclamp
2"flange26

english• SMS 3017 / ISO 2852 for pipes
according to SMS 3008
• DIN 11864-2 series A• DIN 11864-2 series B• ASME BPE (DIN 32676 series C)• DIN 11864-3 series C
DIN 11864-2 series C

PN16
PN16
PN16

Type 8098 FLOWave L
Technical data

Size of the processconnection

Type of processconnection
clamp

DN65, DN80

ASME 2 1/2", 3"

6.4

flangeStandards the process connections
conform to• DIN 32676 series A• DIN 32676 series B• DIN 11864-2 series A

PN
PN10
PN10

• DIN 11864-2 series B

external threaded• DIN 11851

PN10

clamp

• DIN 32676 series C

PN10

Measurement data

In the current section, the term "full scale" refers to full scale of volume flow rate, i.e. the flow rate corresponding to 10 m/s flow velocity.

6.4.1

Volume flow rate

Table 3:

Volume flow rate measurement• Measurement range• Measurement deviation1) 2) for a volume flowrate between 10 % of the full scale and the fullscale
• Measurement deviation1) 2) for a volume flowrate between 1 % of the full scale and 10 % of
the full scale• Repeatability2) for a volume flow rate between
10 % of the full scale and the full scale• Repeatability2) for a volume flow rate between
1 % of the full scale and 10 % of the full scale• Refresh time

• 0...1.7 m3/h to 0...200 m3/h, depending on the DN of
the sensor• ±0.4 % of the measured value• < ±0.08 % of the full scale• ±0.2 % of the measured value• ±0.04 % of the full scale• Adjustable, see chapter 15.15 Setting the refresh time.

1) "Measurement bias" as defined in standard JCGM 200:2012.
2) Determined under the following reference conditions: liquid = water, free of gas bubbles and solids; waterand ambient temperatures = 23 °C ±1 °C (73.4 °F ±1.8 °F), device settings with their default values, shortrefresh time, while maintaining turbulent or laminar flow, applying the minimum inlet (40xDN) and minimum
outlet (1xDN) straight pipe lengths, appropriate pipe dimensions.

6.4.2

Temperature

Table 4:Temperature measurement• Measurement range• Measurement deviation1) for temperatures up
to 100 °C• Measurement deviation1) for temperatures in100...140 °C• Refresh time

• –20 °C...+140 °C• ±1 °C• ±1.5 %•1s1) "Measurement bias" as defined in standard JCGM 200:2012.
27

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Technical data

6.4.3

Differentiation factor

Table 5:DF measurement (optional feature)• Measurement range• Resolution• Repeatability• Refresh time

• 0.8...1.3• 0.00001• ±0.5 % of the measured value• Adjustable, see chapter 15.15 Setting the refresh time.

6.4.4

Acoustic transmission factor

Table 6:

Acoustic transmission factor measurement (optional feature)• Measurement range• Resolution• Repeatability• Refresh time• 10 %...120 %• 0.01 %• ±2 % of the measured value• Adjustable, see chapter 15.15 Setting the refresh time.

6.4.5

Density

Table 7:

Density measurement (optional feature)• Measurement range• Measurement deviation• Repeatability• Refresh time

• 0.78...1.3 g/cm3• ±2 % of the measured value 1)• ±1 % of the measured value 1)• Adjustable, see chapter 15.15 Setting the refresh time.

1) Determined under the following reference conditions: liquid free of gas bubbles and solids; medium and ambient
temperatures = 23 °C ±1 °C (73.4 °F ±1.8 °F), device settings with their default values, refresh time short.

6.4.6

Mass flow rate

Table 8:Mass flow rate measurement (optional feature)• Measurement range• Measurement deviation1) 2) for a mass flowrate between 10 % of the full scale and thefull scale of volume flow rate
• Measurement deviation1) 2) for a mass flowrate between 10 % of the full scale and thefull scale• Repeatability2) for a mass flow rate between
10 % of the full scale and the full scale• Repeatability2) for a mass flow rate between
1 % of the full scale and 10 % of the full scale• Refresh time

• 0...1360 kg/h to 0...260000 kg/h, depending on the DNof the sensor• ±2.4 % of the measured value• ±(2 % of the measured value + 0.08 % of full scale)• ±1.2 % of the measured value• ±(1 % of the measured value + 0.04 % of full scale)• Adjustable, see chapter 15.15 Setting the refresh time.

1) "Measurement bias" as defined in standard JCGM 200:2012.
2) Determined under the following reference conditions: liquid = water, free of gas bubbles and solids; waterand ambient temperatures = 23 °C ±1 °C (73.4 °F ±1.8 °F), device settings with their default values, shortrefresh time, while maintaining turbulent or laminar flow, applying the minimum inlet (40xDN) and minimum
outlet (1xDN) straight pipe lengths, appropriate pipe dimensions.
28

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Technical data

6.5

Electrical data
Voltage not allowed 1)

Ambient temperature °C

Temperature authorized for a limited duration
80

Supply voltage V DC

70

-20

60

35

50

30

40

25

30

20

20

15

10

10

0

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

5

Liquid temperature °C

-10
-20

Fig. 11:

Minimum supply voltage depending on the ambient temperature and the liquid temperature, device variant
with two M20x1.5 cable glands and one 5-pin M12 male connector
Voltage not allowed 1)

Ambient temperature °C

Temperature authorized for a limited duration
80

Supply voltage V DC

70

-20

60

35

50

30

40

25

30

20

20

15

10

10

0
-10

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

5

Liquid temperature °C-20

Fig. 12:Minimum supply voltage depending on the ambient temperature and the liquid temperature, device variant
with two 4-pin M12 female connectors and one 5-pin M12 male connector (Ethernet device variant)1) Only for products with measure board index lower than G (meaning approximatively manufactured before2019).

29

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Technical data

Operating voltage• 12...35 V DC; the minimum voltage to be supplied
depends on the liquid temperature and on the ambient
operating temperature: depending on the device variant,see Fig. 11 or Fig. 12• Current consumption: ≤ 2 A• Filtered and regulated• Tolerance: ±10 %• The device must be connected permanently to a Safety
Extra-Low Voltage circuit (SELV circuit).
• Energize the device through a Limited Power Source(LPS) according to standards UL/EN 60950-1 or througha limited-energy circuit according to standards UL/
EN 61010-1
Power consumption (without the consumption of the outputs)• Device with 2 x M20x1.5 cable glands and1 x 5-pin M12 connector• Device with 2 x 4-pin M12 connectors and1 x 5-pin M12 connector, Ethernet version• Device with 2 x 4-pin M12 connectors and1 x 5-pin M12 connector, Ethernet version,
with display module
Polarity reversal
Analogue output 1, also output 3 if configured
as an analogue output

Digital output 2, also output 3 if configured asa digital output

30

english

•≤5W
•≤8W
•≤9W
Protected• 4...20 mA current; 3.6 mA or 22 mA to indicate an error• Uncertainty: ±0.04 mA• Resolution: 0.8 µA• Open loop detection through diagnostics software
function• Any connection mode, in sink or source mode
• Galvanically isolated, passive• Protected against polarity reversal• Maximum loop impedance− 1300 Ω at 35 V DC,− 1000 Ω at 30 V DC,− 700 Ω at 24 V DC,− 450 Ω at 18 V DC
• Transistor• Any connection mode, in NPN or PNP mode
• Pulse (by default), can be changed by the user
• 0...2000 Hz• 5...35 V DC, ≤ 700 mA• Galvanically isolated, passive• Overload information through diagnostics software
function• Protected against overloads• Protected against polarity reversals

Type 8098 FLOWave L
Technical data

6.6

Mechanical data

Dimensions and weight of the device: refer to the technical data sheet regarding Type 8098 FLOWave L
available at country.burkert.com
Table 9:Materials in contact with ambient air

Component

Material

Transmitter housing1)

Stainless steel 304 / 1.4301, outer surface finish Ra < 1.6 µm

Sensor housing(depending on your device variant)

Stainless steel 304 / 1.4301, outer surface finish Ra < 1.6 µm

Cable glands / Blind plugs / Sealing(depending on your device variant)

Stainless steel / PA6 / TPE
Nickel plated brass / Black polyoxymethylene (POM) / HNBR
and TPE
Stainless steel / Stainless steel / NBR

Stainless steel 316L / 1.4435, outer surface finish Ra < 1.6 µm

5-pin M12 male connector / Screwed
plug / Sealing
Nickel plated brass / Nickel plated brass / NBR(depending on the device variant)
4-pin M12 female connector / Screwed
Stainless steel / Stainless steel / EPDM
plug / Sealing
Pressure compensating element
Stainless steel
External M4 screw for earth connection

Stainless steel A4

Display

Float glass, stainless steel 304 / 1.4301

Seals

VMQ silicone

Adhesive labels

Polyester1) The housing may have slight machining marks due to the manufacturing process. These marks do notaffect the operation of the device and are not a manufacturing defect.
Table 10:Materials in contact with the liquid

Component• Sensor measurement tube
• Pipe connections
Table 11:

Stainless steel 316L / DIN 1.4435 with low delta-ferrite rate

Available surface finish

Component
Measurement tube (inner surface)• Measurement tube (outer surface)• HousingMaterial

Surface finish according to ISO 4288
• Ra < 0.8 μm (30 μin)
• Ra < 0.4 μm (15 μin) (electro-polished)
Ra < 1.6 µm (excluding welding seams)

31

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Technical data

6.7

Specifications of the Ethernet Industrial
communication

Table 12:Specifications of the industrial communication module

Network speed

10/100 mbps

Auto negotiation

Yes

Auto MDI/MDI-X

Yes

Switch function

Yes

Network diagnostics

Yes, via error telegram

MAC-ID

Individual identification number, stored in the module and on theoutside of the device (see Type label)

Device name Ethernet (factory setting)

FLOWave (name can be changed)

6.7.1

Modbus TCP protocol

TCP port

502

ProtocolInternet protocol, version 4 (IPv4)

Network topology• Tree• Star• Line (open daisy chain)

IP configuration• Static IP address• Not supported:− BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol)− DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)

Transmission speed

10 and 100 MBit/s

Data transport layer

EtherNet II, IEEE 802.3

Modbus function codes

1, 2, 3, 4, 15, 16, 23

Read/write register

Maximum 125 read registers and 123 write registers per telegram

Message mode

ServerInput (Target to Originator)• All diagnostics and errors information has the highest priority
and can be read by a PLC (refer to the concerned protocol fileavailable at country.burkert.com).
• PDO: value, status, unit
• Device and modules: status• Functions: value, status
PDO = Process Data Object, Target = Server, Originator = Client.

32

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Technical data

6.7.2

PROFINET protocol

Product typeCompact field IO device

PROFINET IO specification

V2.3

Network topology• Tree• Star• Ring (closed daisy chain)• Line (open daisy chain)

Network management• LLDP (Link Layer Discovery Protocol)• SNMP V1 (Simple Network Management
Protocol)• MIB-II (Management Information Base)• Physical device

Additional supported features• DCP (Discovery and Configuration Protocol)• VLAN- and priority tagging• Shared device• RTC (Real Time Cyclic) protocol: Class 1• Not supported:− IRT (In Real Time)

Transmission speed

100 MBit/s full duplex

Data transport layer

EtherNet II, IEEE 802.3

Maximum supported conformance class

CC-B

Media Redundancy (for ring topology)

MRP client is supported

Minimum cycle time

10 ms

Input cyclic data (device to IO-controller or device to
IO-supervisor)• All diagnostics and errors information has thehighest priority and can be read by a PLC(refer to the concerned protocol file available atcountry.burkert.com).
• PDO: value, status, unit
• Device and modules: status• Functions: value, status

Application Relations (AR)The device can simultaneously process up to
2 IO-ARs, 1 Supervisor AR and 1 Supervisor DAAR.

GSDml file

Download from: country.burkert.com

PDO = Process Data Object

33

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Technical data

6.7.3

EtherNet/IP protocol

ProtocolInternet protocol, version 4 (IPv4)

Network topology• Tree• Star• DLR (Device Level Ring) for closed daisy chain• Linear for open daisy chain

IP configuration• Static IP address• BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol)• DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)

CIP reset services (Common Industrial Protocol)

Reset service (type 0 or type 1) of the Identity
objectTransmission speed

10 and 100 MBit/s

Duplex modes

Half duplex, full duplex, auto-negotiation

Data transport layer

EtherNet II, IEEE 802.3

MDI modes (Medium Dependant Interface)

MDI, MDI-X, auto-MDI-X

Predefined standard objects• Identity (0x01)• Message Router (0x02)• Assembly (0x04)• Connection Manager (0x06)• DLR (0x47)• QoS (0x48)• TCP/IP Interface (0xF5)• EtherNet Link (0xF6)

Additional supported features• ACD (Address Conflict Detection• Integrated switch

RPI (Requested Packet Interval)• Minimum: 100 ms• Maximum: 9999 ms

Input (Consumer to Producer or Adapter to Scanner) • All diagnostics and errors information has thehighest priority and can be read by a PLC(refer to the concerned protocol file available atcountry.burkert.com).
• PDO: value, status, unit
• Device and modules: status• Functions: value, status
EDS file
Download from: country.burkert.com
PDO = Process Data Object, Consumer = Server, Producer = Client, Adapter = Server, Scanner = Client.

34

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Technical data

6.7.4

EtherCAT protocol

Industrial Ethernet interface X1, X2• X1: EtherCAT IN• X2: EtherCAT OUT

Maximum number of cyclic input and output data

512 bytes in total

Maximum number of cyclic input data

1024 bytes

Maximum number of cyclic output data

1024 bytes

Acyclic communication (CoE)• SDO• SDO master-slave• SDO slave-slave (depends on master capacity)

Type

Complex slave

Fieldbus Memory Management Units (FMMUs)

8

Sync Managers

4

Transmission speed

100 Mbit/s

Data transport network

Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3

EtherCAT® is a registered trademark and patented technology, licensed by Beckhoff Automation GmbH,Germany

35

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Technical data

36

englishType 8098 FLOWave L﻿Installation in the pipe
7

INSTALLATION IN THE PIPE.................................................................................................................38
7.1

Safety instructions......................................................................................................................38

7.2

Additional documentation..........................................................................................................39

7.3

Preparing the device before installation into the pipe..............................................................39
7.3.1

Changing the position of the transmitter on the sensor...........................................39

7.3.2

Switching positions of the blind cover and the display module or the
Wi‑Fi module...............................................................................................................43

7.4

Recommendations for the installation into the pipe.................................................................46

7.5

Installing the device into the pipe..............................................................................................49
7.5.1

Before installing the device into the pipe..................................................................49

7.5.2

Installing a device with clamp connections..............................................................49

7.5.3

Installing a device with flange connections..............................................................50

7.5.4

Installing a device with external-threaded connections according to
DIN 11851 series A for pipes according to DIN 11850 .............................................51

37

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Installation in the pipe

7

INSTALLATION IN THE PIPE

7.1

Safety instructions
DANGER

Risk of injury due to electrical voltage.
▶ Before carrying out work on the system, disconnect the electrical power for all the conductors and isolate it.
▶ In accordance with standard UL/EN 61010-1, all equipment connected to the Type 8098 FLOWave L
flowmeter shall be double insulated with respect to the mains and all circuits connected to the Type 8098
FLOWave L flowmeter must be limited energy circuits.
▶ Observe all applicable accident protection and safety regulations for electrical equipment.
Risk of injury due to pressure in the installation.
▶ Before any intervention in the installation, stop the circulation of liquid, cut off the pressure and drain thepipe.
▶ Before any intervention in the installation, make sure there is no pressure in the pipe.
▶ Observe the dependency between the liquid temperature and the liquid pressure for the fitting used.
If switched on for a prolonged time, risk of burns or fire due to hot device surfaces▶ Do not touch with bare hands.
▶ Keep the device away from highly flammable substances and liquids.
Risk of burns due to high liquid temperatures.
▶ Do not touch with bare hands the parts of the device that are in contact with the liquid.
▶ Use safety gloves to handle the device.
▶ Before opening the pipe, stop the circulation of liquid and drain the pipe.
▶ Before opening the pipe, make sure the pipe is completely empty.
Risk of injury due to the nature of the liquid.
▶ Respect the prevailing regulations on accident prevention and safety relating to the use of dangerous
liquids.

WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-conforming installation.
▶ The electrical and liquid installations must only be carried out by qualified and authorized personnel withthe appropriate tools.

WARNING
Risk of injury due to unintentional switch-on of the power supply or uncontrolled restart of theinstallation.
▶ Take appropriate measures to avoid unintentional activation of the installation.
38▶ Guarantee a set or controlled process restart after carrying out any device intervention.

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Installation in the pipe

CAUTION
Risk of injury due to a heavy device.
A heavy device can fall down during transport or during installation and cause injuries.
▶ Transport, install and dismantle a heavy device with the help of another person.
▶ Use appropriate tools.

NOTICEThe device will be damaged if you use a tool to turn the blind cover or the display module.
▶ Do not use a tool to turn the blind cover or the display module.
Risk of failure or risk of accelerated ageing of electrical components.
▶ Observe the dependence between liquid temperature and ambient temperature (see Fig. 9 andFig. 10).

7.2

Additional documentation→ If the device is an ATEX / IECEx device variant, then refer to the ATEX / IECEx supplement for Type 8098
FLOWave L available on the internet at country.burkert.com.

7.3

Preparing the device before installation into the pipe

The device is delivered as described in chapter 5.1.
Before installing the device into the pipe, you may:
• change the position of the transmitter on the sensor. Refer to chapter 7.3.1.
• switch positions of the display module or of the Wi-Fi module and the blind cover. Refer to chapter 7.3.2.

7.3.1

Changing the position of the transmitter on the sensor

These instructions are valid for all the device variants.
The transmitter can have four positions on the Type S097 flow sensor. See Fig. 13.

39

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Installation in the pipe

Fig. 13:

Possible positions of the transmitter→ To change the position of the transmitter, do the following:
For safety reasons and to comply with standard
UL 61010-1, the blind cover and the display moduleor the Wi-Fi module are locked.

→ Prepare the unlocking magnetic key, which isdelivered with the device, to change the positionof the transmitter.

The blind cover or the display module or
the Wi-Fi module is locked

1. Put the magnetic key on themark related
to the display module. You should hear a soft
click indicating that the display module or the
Wi-Fi module is unlocked. Do not use a tool toturn the display module.

2. While the magnetic key is on themark,turn the display module or the Wi-Fi moduleby hand only from the locked position to theunlocked position. If you cannot turn the display
module or the Wi-Fi module by hand, contact
Bürkert.

40

englishThe blind cover, the display module or
the Wi-Fi module is unlocked

Type 8098 FLOWave L
Installation in the pipe

3.

Carefully lift the display module or
the Wi-Fi module because a cable connects
the display module or the Wi-Fi module to thetransmitter.

4. Push the tab of the cable connector to disconnect the display module or the Wi-Fi modulefrom the transmitter.
5. Remove the display module or the Wi-Fi moduleand put it on a clean surface to protect the sealfrom dirt.

Push the tab tounlock the cableconnector

6. Use a size 3 hexagonal key to loosen the screwthat is marked with the arrow and that locks thetransmitter to the flow sensor.

7. Hold the flow sensor with one hand and, withthe other hand, turn the transmitter by about
20 degrees counterclockwise.

41

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Installation in the pipe

8.

Lift the transmitter carefully because acable connects the transmitter to the flow sensor.

9. If the seal is damaged, replace it. Apply a layerof lithium soap grease to the new seal before you
put it in place.
10.If the seal is not located in the groove, put it backin the groove.
Seal in the groove:correct
11.Turn the transmitter to the desired position.

12.

Fold the cable in a Z-shape and makesure the cable stays inside the transmitter.

13.Turn the transmitter by about 20 degrees
clockwise.

42

englishSeal not in thegroove: NOT correct

Type 8098 FLOWave L
Installation in the pipe

14.Screw the transmitter clockwise on the flow
sensor until the blind cover is perfectly parallel orperpendicular to the axis of the pipe.

15.Fasten the screw with a size 3 hexagonal
key to a tightening torque of 1.3 ±0.5 Nm(0.96 ±0.37 ft·lbf)

16.Connect the display module or the Wi-Fi module
to the transmitter.
17.Put the mark of the cover on the unlockedmarking of the transmitter housing and screw
the cover clockwise on the transmitter until themark is on the locked position. You should heara click.

7.3.2

Switching positions of the blind cover and the display moduleor the Wi‑Fi module

CAUTION
Risk of injury due to a heavy device.
A heavy device can fall down during transport or during installation and cause injuries.
▶ Transport, install and dismantle a heavy device with the help of another person.
▶ Use appropriate tools.
These instructions are valid for all the device variants.
Upon delivery, a display module is screwed on the top and a blind cover is screwed on the housing side.

43

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Installation in the pipe

→ To switch positions of the display module or the Wi-Fi module and the blind cover, do the following:
For safety reasons and to comply with standard
UL 61010-1, the blind cover and the display moduleor the Wi-Fi module are locked.

→ Prepare the unlocking magnetic key, which isdelivered with the device.

The blind cover or the display module or the Wi-Fi
module is locked
1. Put the magnetic key on themark related
to the display module or the Wi-Fi module. You
should hear a soft click indicating that the display
module or the Wi-Fi module is unlocked. Do not
use a tool to turn the display module or the Wi-Fi
module.
2. While the magnetic key is on themark,turn the display module or the Wi-Fi moduleby hand only from the locked position to theunlocked position. If you cannot turn the display
module or the Wi-Fi module by hand, contact
Bürkert.
3. Carefully lift the display module or the Wi-Fi
module because a cable connects the display
module or the Wi-Fi module to the transmitter.

The display module or the Wi-Fi module isunlocked

4. Push the tab of the cable connector to disconnect the display module or the Wi-Fi modulefrom the transmitter.
5. Remove the display module or the Wi-Fi moduleand put it on a clean surface to protect the sealfrom dirt.

Push the tab tounlock the cableconnector

44

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Installation in the pipe

6. Put the magnetic key on themark related
to the blind cover. You should hear a click indicating that the blind cover is unlocked. Do not
use a tool to turn the blind cover.
7. Turn the blind cover by hand only to the unlocked
position and remove it. If you cannot turn theblind cover by hand, contact Bürkert.

8. Put the cable of the display module or the Wi-Fi
module through the front opening.

Connect the cable here

9. Connect the cable to the connector, as shown in
the figure.
10.Put the mark of the display module or the Wi-Fi
module on the unlocked marking of the transmitter housing and screw the cover clockwise
on the transmitter until the mark is on the locked
position.

11.Put the mark of the blind cover on the unlockedmarking of the top of the transmitter housing.

12.Screw the blind cover clockwise on the transmitter until the mark is on the locked position.
You should hear a click.

The blind cover is locked.

45

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Installation in the pipe

7.4

Recommendations for the installation into the pipe

The device can be installed into either horizontal, oblique or vertical pipes. But an installation on a verticalpipe is better to prevent air bubbles or gas bubbles to remain in the sensor measurement-tube.
In any case and according to the device variant, make sure to respect the following recommendations:→ Protect this device against electromagnetic interference, ultraviolet rays and, when installed outdoors,
the effects of climatic conditions.

→ If the mass of the device could kink the pipe, install adapted pipe supports before mounting the device
in the pipe.

→ Always install a heavy device with the help of another person and with the use of appropriate tools.
→ If the liquid temperature is subject to variations, make sure that the device can expand freely.
→ Make sure the DN of the measurement tube is suited to the flow velocity: refer to the data sheet of thedevice, available at country.burkert.com.

The device is not intended to measure the flow rate of liquids if gas bubbles are present, whatever
the origin of the bubbles (air intake, cavitation, degassing …).

→ Choose a location with enough free space to put the magnetic key on the symbol at the side of the device.
→ Install the device upstream a valve or any equipment that changes the pipe diameter or the pipe
direction.

→ If you cannot install the device upstream a valve or any equipment that changes the pipe diameter or thepipe direction, observe the straight downstream distances depending on the design of the pipes. Referto standard ISO 9104:1991 and Fig. 14. If these recommendations cannot be complied with, contact
Bürkert.

IF YOU CANNOT INSTALL THE DEVICE UPSTREAM A VALVE OR ANY EQUIPMENT THAT CHANGESTHE PIPE DIAMETER OR THE PIPE DIRECTION, THEN OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING DISTANCES
Flow direction
2 x 90° elbow
joint

Control valve

40 x DN

1 x DN

60 x DN

1 x DN2 x 90°elbow joint, 3dimensional
Fig. 14:50 x DN

1 x DN

40 x DN

1 x DN90° elbow joint
or T-piece

Upstream and downstream straight distances for special pipe designs (example for a horizontal
installation)46

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Installation in the pipe

→ To make sure that neither air bubbles nor gas bubbles trouble the measuring, install the device as rec-α

40 x DN

ﬂow direction

ommended in Fig. 15.

1 x DNﬂow direction

ﬂow direction

ﬂow direction

Recommended

Not recommended

Not recommended

Not recommended

α is the minimum angle to the horizontal for proper self-draining (see Table 13)
Fig. 15:

Orientation of a device to avoid air bubbles and gas bubbles→ To allow proper self-draining and to respect the 3A and EHEDG requirements, install the device into apipe with a minimum angle against the horizontal. See Table 13.

Table 13:

Minimum angle against the horizontal for proper self-draining

Type of process connection Standards the process connections conform to• DIN 32676 series A
clamp

flange• DIN 11864-3 series A• SMS 3017 / ISO 2852 for pipes according to
SMS 3008

DIN 11864-2 series A

Angle against thehorizontal
For DN15 to DN50:
minimum 5°
For DN8 and DN65 to
DN100:
minimum 3°
For DN15 to DN50:
minimum 5°
For DN8 and DN65 to
DN100:
minimum 3°• ASME BPE (DIN 32676 series C)
clamp

flangeexternal threaded• DIN 32676 series B

minimum 3°• DIN 11864-3 series B• DIN 11864-3 series C• DIN 11864-2 series B

minimum 3°• DIN 11864-2 series C
DIN 11851 series A

minimum 3°→ If the pipe is fitted with a thermal insulation, do not thermally insulate the measurement tube of thedevice to make sure that the temperature in the device is less than 70 °C. Refer to Fig. 16 and, for theminimum supply voltage, to chapter 8.3.

47

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Installation in the pipe

No pipe insulation

Pipe insulation

Fig. 16:

Thermal insulation of the pipe

→ To make sure the internal temperature of the transmitter with cable glands does not exceed theauthorized maximum value, install the device as recommended in Fig. 17.

→ To make sure the internal temperature of the transmitter does not exceed the authorized maximum value,
install an Ethernet device variant as recommended in Fig. 18.

To avoid effects of high liquid temperatures:

To limit the effects of low liquid temperatures,or in case of high relative humidity / possible
condensation:

Recommended 1)

Recommended 1)
Not recommended

Recommended 1)

Recommended 1)

1) These orientations are valid for all the positions of the transmitter on the Type S097 flow sensor. Refer to Fig. 13:
Possible positions of the transmitter
Fig. 17:

Orientation of a device variant with cable glands

48

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Installation in the pipe

Recommended 1)

Not recommended

Not recommended

Recommended 1)

Recommended 1)

1) These orientations are valid for all the positions of the Type SE98 transmitter on the Type S097 flow sensor. Refer toFig. 13: Possible positions of the transmitter
Fig. 18:

Orientation of an Ethernet device variant to permit the heat dissipation

7.5

Installing the device into the pipe
CAUTION

Risk of injury due to a heavy device.
A heavy device can fall down during transport or during installation and cause injuries.
▶ Transport, install and dismantle a heavy device with the help of another person.
▶ Use appropriate tools.

7.5.1

Before installing the device into the pipe

• Prepare the device as described in chapter 7.3.
• Follow the recommendations given in chapter 7.4.

7.5.2

Installing a device with clamp connections

The device manufacturer does not supply any gaskets for the process connections.

→ If the installation must be EHEDG-compliant and the device is fitted with clamp connections according

to ASME BPE (DIN 32676 series C), DIN 32676 series A, DIN 32676 series B or SMS 3017 / ISO 2852 forpipes according to SMS 3008, then use EHEDG-compliant gaskets from Combifit International B.V.

→ To make sure that you use EHEDG-compliant gaskets, refer to the "EHEDG Position Paper" available on
the EHEDG website.

→ The clamp connections according to DIN 11864-3 series A, B and C are hygienic connections. You can
use any gaskets that are adapted to the process.

→ Make sure that the gaskets on the clamp connections are in good condition.
→ Place gaskets adapted to the process (temperature, liquid type) in the grooves of the clamp connections.
→ Attach the clamp connections to the pipe with clamp collars. Make sure that tightening the clamp does
not create bulges at the gaskets. Gasket bulges can lead to wrong measurements.

49

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Installation in the pipe

7.5.3

Installing a device with flange connections→ The flange connections according to DIN 11864-2 series A, B and C are hygienic connections. You can
use any gaskets that are adapted to the process.

→ Make sure that the gaskets on the flange connections are in good condition.
→ Place gaskets adapted to the process (temperature, liquid type) in the grooves of the flange connections.
→ Use bolts with dimensions as given in the relevant flange standard and adapted to the process.
→ Tighten the bolts to a torque as given in the relevant flange standard to fix the fitting to the pipe.

50

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Installation in the pipe

7.5.4

Installing a device with external-threaded connections
according to DIN 11851 series A for pipes according to
DIN 11850

To install this device variant, respect the mounting standards that are applicable to the process.

→ Supply the following accessories that are not delivered by the device manufacturer. The accessories
must be adapted to the process and to the device:• 2 round slotted nuts
• 2 conical ferrules• 2 gaskets that respect the standard DIN 11851. If the installation must be EHEDG-compliant, then supply
EHEDG-compliant gaskets. For an EHEDG-compliant use, Burkert recommends gaskets of one of the following type:− ASEPTO-STAR k-flex upgrade gaskets from Kieselmann GmbH, Germany,− SKS gaskets set DIN 11851 EHEDG with EPDM or FKM inner gasket from Siersema Komponenten
Service (S.K.S.) B.V., Netherlands
Installation procedure:
1. Put the round slotted nuts on the pipe. Respect the mounting direction of the round slotted nuts so thatthey can be screwed on the external-threaded connections of the device. Refer to Fig. 19.
GasketConical ferrule
Round slotted nut

External-threaded connection

Fig. 19:

Pipe

Mounting order of the accessories

2. Weld the conical ferrules to the pipe.
3. Place the gaskets in the grooves of the external-threaded connections of the device. Respect themounting direction of the gaskets.
4. Screw the round slotted nuts and tighten them according to the mounting standards that are applicableto the process.

51

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Installation in the pipe

52

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
﻿Electrical installation
8

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION................................................................................................................54
8.1

Safety instructions......................................................................................................................54

8.2

Additional documentation..........................................................................................................56

8.3

Connecting the device to a power supply.................................................................................56

8.4

Connecting the device to a büS / CANopen network...............................................................57

8.5

Activating the device internal termination resistor....................................................................59

8.6

Specifications of the cables for the M20x1.5 cable glands (device variant with cableglands).........................................................................................................................................59

8.7

Specifications of the conductors for the 12 push-in terminal strip..........................................60

8.8

Terminal assignment of the 12 push-in terminal strip...............................................................60

8.9

Opening the front of the transmitter...........................................................................................61

8.10 Wiring the device through the M20x1.5 cable glands in stainless steel (device variant
with cable glands).......................................................................................................................63
8.11 Wiring the device through the M20x1.5 cable glands in nickel plated brass (device
variant with cable glands)...........................................................................................................65
8.12 Connecting the functional earth (device variant with two M20x1.5 cable glands)..................67
8.13 Connecting the device to a 12...35 V DC power supply through the M20x1.5 cableglands (device variant with cable glands)..................................................................................67
8.14 Wiring output 1 (analogue) and output 3 configured as an analogue output (device
variant with cable glands)...........................................................................................................69
8.15 Wiring output 2 (digital) and output 3 configured as a digital output (device variant
with cable glands).......................................................................................................................70
8.16 Knowing the status of the Ethernet network (device variant with two 4-pin M12 female
connectors – Ethernet device variant).......................................................................................71
8.17 Specifications of the cables and conductors for the 4-pin M12 female connectors...............72
8.18 Connecting the device to an Ethernet network (device variant with two 4-pin M12female connectors – Ethernet device variant)...........................................................................72
8.19 Connecting the functional earth (device variant with two 4-pin M12 female connectors– Ethernet device variant)...........................................................................................................73

53

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Electrical installation

8

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

8.1

Safety instructions
DANGER

Risk of injury due to electrical voltage.
▶ Before carrying out work on the system, disconnect the electrical power for all the conductors and isolate it.
▶ In accordance with standard UL/EN 61010-1, all equipment connected to the Type 8098 FLOWave L
flowmeter shall be double insulated with respect to the mains and all circuits connected to theType 8098 FLOWave L flowmeter must be limited energy circuits.
▶ Observe all applicable accident protection and safety regulations for electrical equipment.
Risk of injury due to pressure in the installation.
▶ Before any intervention in the installation, stop the circulation of liquid, cut off the pressure and drain thepipe.
▶ Before any intervention in the installation, make sure there is no pressure in the pipe.
▶ Observe the dependency between the liquid temperature and the liquid pressure for the fitting used.
If switched on for a prolonged time, risk of burns or fire due to hot device surfaces▶ Do not touch with bare hands.
▶ Keep the device away from highly flammable substances and liquids.
Risk of burns due to high liquid temperatures.
▶ Do not touch with bare hands the parts of the device that are in contact with the liquid.
▶ Use safety gloves to handle the device.
▶ Before opening the pipe, stop the circulation of liquid and drain the pipe.
▶ Before opening the pipe, make sure the pipe is completely empty.
Risk of injury due to the nature of the liquid.
▶ Respect the prevailing regulations on accident prevention and safety relating to the use of dangerous
liquids.

54

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Electrical installation

WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-conforming installation.
▶ The electrical and liquid installations must only be carried out by qualified and authorized personnel withthe appropriate tools.
▶ Fit a circuit breaker or a switch to the electrical installation of the building in which the device isinstalled.
▶ Install the circuit breaker or the switch in an easily accessible place.
▶ Identify the circuit breaker or the switch as the disconnecting component for the electrical power supply
to the device.
▶ Install overload devices that are appropriate for electrical installation.
▶ Observe standard NF C 15-100 / IEC 60364.

WARNING
Risk of injury due to unintentional switch on of the power supply or uncontrolled restart of the installation.
▶ Take appropriate measures to avoid unintentional activation of the installation.
▶ Guarantee a set or controlled process restart after carrying out any intervention on the device.

CAUTION
Risk of injury due to a heavy device.
A heavy device can fall down during transport or during installation and cause injuries.
▶ Transport, install and dismantle a heavy device with the help of another person.
▶ Use appropriate tools.

NOTICEThe device will be damaged if you use a tool to turn the blind cover or the display module.
▶ Do not use a tool to turn the blind cover or the display module.

NOTICE
If you try to remove the nut from a stainless steel M20x1.5 cable gland, the device is no longer tight.
▶ Do not remove the nut of a stainless steel M20x1.5 cable gland. The nut of a stainless steel M20x1.5
cable gland cannot be removed.
▶ Turn the nut until the stop. If you turn beyond the stop, the cable gland unscrews from the device andthe device is no longer tight.

NOTICE
If the screwed plug of a 5-pin M12 male connector is removed, the device is not tight.
▶ If the 5-pin M12 male connector is not used, do not remove the screwed plug.
▶ Screw the plug to the 5-pin M12 male connector to a torque of 2 Nm.

55

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Electrical installation

NOTICE
If the screwed plug of a 4-pin M12 female connector is removed, the device is not tight.
▶ If the 4-pin M12 female connector is not used, do not remove the screwed plug.
▶ Screw the plug to the 4-pin M12 female connector to a torque of 1.3 Nm (0.96 ft·lbf).

NOTICEThe device with M20x1.5 cable glands is not tight if a cable gland is not used
▶ Make sure the unused M20x1.5 cable glands are sealed with the supplied plugs.
▶ When the blind plug is inserted, screw the cable-gland nut in stainless steel to a torque of 3 Nm
(2.21 ft·lbf).
▶ When the blind plug is inserted, screw the cable-gland nut in nickel plated brass to a torque of 8 Nm
(5.90 ft·lbf).
▶ Use a high quality electrical power supply, filtered and regulated.
▶ Do not install the cables near high voltage or high frequency cables; if this cannot be avoided,
observe a minimum distance of 30 cm.
On a device with M20x1.5 cable glands, put only one cable in each cable gland.
To do the electrical installation of a device with two 4-pin M12 female connectors (Ethernet device
variant) that is connected to an Ethernet network, observe standard ISO / IEC 61918.

8.2

Additional documentation• For more information on büS, read the cabling guide available in English and in Japanese (Cabling_guide_
for_büS/EDIP.pdf) at country.burkert.com.
• For more information on CANopen that is related to the device, refer to the Operating Instructions"CANopen Network configuration" at country.burkert.com.
• If the device is an ATEX / IECEx device variant, then refer to the ATEX / IECEx supplement for Type 8098
FLOWave L available on the internet at country.burkert.com.

8.3

Connecting the device to a power supply

The device is wired in the factory to be easily energized through the 5-pin M12 male connector.

→ Connect the device with two 4-pin M12 female connectors (Ethernet device variant) to a 12...35 V DC
power supply through the 5-pin M12 male connector; Refer to chapter 8.4.

A device with two 4-pin M12 female connectors (Ethernet device variant) must be energized throughthe 5-pin M12 male connector.

→ Connect the device with M20x1.5 cable glands to a 12...35 V DC power supply:• either through the 5-pin M12 male connector, refer to chapter 8.4.
• or through the M20x1.5 cable glands and the terminal strip located in the transmitter housing. Refer tochapter 8.13 for the wiring procedure.
56

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Electrical installation

The minimum voltage to be supplied depends on the device variant, on the liquid temperature and on theambient operating temperature: see Fig. 20 and Fig. 21.
Voltage not allowed

Ambient temperature °C

Temperature authorized for a limited duration
80

Supply voltage V DC

70

-20

60

35

50

30

40

25

30

20

20

15

10

10

0

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

5

Liquid temperature °C

-10
-20

Fig. 20:

Minimum supply voltage depending on the ambient temperature and the liquid temperature, device variant
with two M20x1.5 cable glands and one 5-pin M12 male connector
Voltage not allowed

Ambient temperature °C

Temperature authorized for a limited duration
80

Supply voltage V DC

70

-20

60

35

50

30

40

25

30

20

20

15

10

10

0

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

-10

5

Liquid temperature °C-20

Fig. 21:

Minimum supply voltage depending on the ambient temperature and the liquid temperature, device variant
with two 4-pin M12 female connectors and one 5-pin M12 male connector (Ethernet device variant)

8.4

Connecting the device to a büS / CANopen network

For a correct operation of the device, use a 5-pin M12 female connector in stainless steel with shield connection. The büS cable that is available from Bürkert has an external diameter of 8.2 mm.

→ Make sure that the büS cable passes through the 5-pin M12 female connector.
→ Observe the specifications for the cable and conductors, that are given by the manufacturer of the 5-pin
female connector.

The 5-pin M12 male connector (A-coding) is used to connect the device:• To a 12...35 V DC power supply and/or• To the büS / CANopen network.
57

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Electrical installation→ To connect the device, remove the screwed plug of the 5-pin M12 male connector and store thescrewed plug in a safe and clean place.

Risk of damage to the device if an M12 connector is unused.
▶ Put a screwed plug on all the unused M12 connectors.
Malfunction of the internal and external communication if the 5-pin M12 male connector is not used
to connect the device to a büS fieldbus or a CANopen fieldbus.
▶ Make sure pin 4 (CAN_H) and pin 5 (CAN_L) are both contact free if the 5-pin M12 male connector
is not connected to a büS fieldbus or a CANopen fieldbus.

→ If the device is connected to a büS network or to a CANopen network and installed at one end of thebüS network or of the CANopen network, either install one or two 120 Ω termination resistors in the lineor activate the device internal termination resistor: see chapter 8.5. The büS or CANopen line must be
adapted to reached 60 Ω.
The internal termination resistor is no more available after 12/2022. Nevertheless it could happen
that the termination resistor activation menu is still visible on the display.
If a device with two 4-pin M12 female connectors (Ethernet device variant) is connected to an Ethernet network, you must connect it to a büS / CANopen network for the configuration of the device
with the software Bürkert Communicator.
• Pin 1: CAN shield

2
3
Fig. 22:• Pin 2: 12...35 V DC

5 1
4• Pin 3: GND• Pin 4: CAN_H• Pin 5: CAN_L

Pin assignment of the 5-pin M12 male connector

Cable and conductors
connected inside thedevice to the 5-pin M12
male connector
Fig. 23:

Wiring ex works of the 12 push-in terminal strip to the 5-pin M12 male connector

58

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Electrical installation

8.5

Activating the device internal termination resistor
The internal termination resistor is no more available after 12/2022. Nevertheless it could happen
that the termination resistor activation menu is still visible on the display.

The device has an internal termination resistor that can be activated if the device is installed at one end of abüS network or of a CANopen network.
If you activate the device internal termination resistor, do not install more than one termination resistor at thesame end of the büS network or of the CANopen network.
To have an adapted network, connect one termination resistor at each end of the network.
To activate the device internal termination resistor, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

büS

→

Advanced→

Termination resistor

→

On

→

Save.
The internal termination resistor is activated.

8.6

Specifications of the cables for the M20x1.5 cableglands (device variant with cable glands)

Table 14:

Specifications of the cables for the M20x1.5 cable glands in nickel plated brass

Specification of the cables
Electromagnetic protection (EMC)
Diameter
Maximum operating temperature
Table 15:

Recommended value
Shielded
5...14 mm
80 °C or higher

Specifications of the cables for the M20x1.5 cable glands in stainless steel

Specification of the cables
Electromagnetic protection (EMC)
Diameter
Maximum operating temperature

Recommended value
Shielded
6...12 mm
80 °C or higher

59

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Electrical installation

8.7

Specifications of the conductors for the 12 push-in
terminal strip

Table 16:

Specifications of the conductors for the terminal strip

Specification of the conductors

Recommended value range

Cross section of a solid conductor H05(07) V-U
Cross section of a stranded conductor H05(07) V-K,
with a wire ferrule but without collar
Cross section of a stranded conductor H05(07) V-K,
with a wire ferrule with a plastic collar
Cross section of other kinds of conductors

0.25...1.5 mm2
0.25...1.5 mm2

8.8

0.25...0.75 mm2
0.2...1.5 mm2 (AWG24...AWG16)

Terminal assignment of the 12 push-in terminal strip

The terminal strip located in the transmitter housing has 12 push-in terminals.

→ To access the 12 push-in terminal strip, open the front of the transmitter; see chapter 8.9.

Fig. 24:

Wiring ex works of the 12 push-in terminal strip→ If you need to disconnect a conductor, first push the terminal with a slot screwdriver 3.0 mm (any length)
and a force of max. 40 N.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Green LED

60

Orange LED(device variant with two M20x1.5 cable glands)• Green LED:− flashes slowly if the operation of the device is correct.
− flashes quickly if there is a communication problem with the measurement board.
• Orange LED lit if the related digital output is switched to ON (device variant with two M20x1.5 cable glands)• Terminal 1: GND (blue conductor, factory wired, internally connected to the 5-pin M12 male connector)• Terminal 2: CAN_L (grey conductor, factory wired, internally connected to the 5-pin M12 male connector)• Terminal 3: CAN_shield (brown conductor, factory wired, internally connected to the 5-pin M12 maleconnector)• Terminal 4: CAN_H (black conductor, factory wired, internally connected to the 5-pin M12 male connector)• Terminal 5: 12...35 V DC (white conductor, factory wired, internally connected to the 5-pin M12 maleconnector)

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Electrical installation

On a device with two 4-pin M12 female connectors (Ethernet device variant), do not use terminals
6 to 12. The outputs are inactive.
• Terminal 6: GND (for the connection of the power supply through the M20x1.5 cable glands)• Terminal 7: negative output 3 (analogue output or digital output)• Terminal 8: positive output 3 (analogue output or digital output)• Terminal 9: negative output 2 (digital output)• Terminal 10: positive output 2 (digital output)• Terminal 11: negative output 1 (analogue output)• Terminal 12: positive output 1 (analogue output)
Fig. 25:

Terminal assignment of the 12 push-in terminal strip located in the transmitter housing

8.9

Opening the front of the transmitter

To open the front of the transmitter housing, remove either the blind cover or the display module or the
Wi-Fi module.
Procedure to open the front of the transmitter if the blind cover is on the front of the device

1. Put the magnetic key on themark related
to the blind cover. You should hear a click indicating that the blind cover is unlocked. Do not
use a tool to turn the blind cover.
2. Turn the blind cover by hand to the unlocked
position and remove it.

Fig. 26:

Procedure to open the front of the transmitter if the blind cover is on the front of the device

61

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Electrical installation

Procedure to open the front of the transmitter  if the display module or the Wi-Fi module is on the frontof the device
1. Remove the blind cover from the top of thetransmitter.

2. Put the magnetic key on themark related
to the display module or the Wi-Fi module. You
should hear a click indicating that the display
module or the Wi-Fi module is unlocked. Do not
use a tool to turn the display module or the Wi-Fi
module.
3. Turn the display module or the Wi-Fi module byhand to the unlocked position.

4.

Carefully pull the display module or
the Wi-Fi module because a cable connects
the display module or the Wi-Fi module to thetransmitter.

Push the tab tounlock the cableconnector

5. Push the tab of the cable connector to disconnect the display module or the Wi-Fi modulefrom the transmitter.
6. Remove the display module or the Wi-Fi moduleand put it on a clean surface to protect the sealfrom dirt.
Fig. 27:

Procedure to open the front of the transmitter if the display module or the Wi-Fi module is on the front of
the device

62

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Electrical installation

8.10

Wiring the device through the M20x1.5 cable glands instainless steel (device variant with cable glands)

Put only one cable in each cable gland.

→ Prepare cables that obey the specifications given
in chapter 8.6 and chapter 8.7.

→ To open the front of the transmitter, follow the
instructions given in chapter 8.9.

1. Use a size 2 hexagonal key to loosen the 2screws of the functional earth plate.

2. Strip 100 mm of the cable.

2 screws

8 mm

3. Reduce the shield to 20 mm.
4. Expose 8 mm of the conductors.
20 mm
100 mm ±55. Loosen the nut of the cable gland.
6. Do not remove the nut of a stainless steel
M20x1.5 cable gland. The nut of a stainless steel
M20x1.5 cable gland cannot be removed.
7. Turn the nut until the stop. If you turn beyond thestop, the cable gland unscrews from the device
and the device is no longer tight.
8. Remove the blind plug of the cable gland andstore the blind plug in a safe and clean place.
9. Put the cable through the cable gland as shownin the figure.
10.Use a size 22 hexagonal key to tighten the cablegland to a torque of 5 Nm (3.7 ft·lbf).
11.Attach each cable to the functional earth plate.
The shield must be in contact with the functional
earth plate.

63

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Electrical installation

12.Put the functional earth plate in its original place.
Functional earth

13.Use a size 10 hexagonal key to tighten the 2screws of the functional earth plate to a torque of
0.2 Nm (0.15 ft·lbf).

2 screws

IT IS NOT MANDATORY TO CONNECT
THE DEVICE TO A PROTECTIVE EARTH –MEANT FOR FUTURE USE
14.Put each conductor in the correct terminal of the terminal strip.
15.To connect the 12...35 V DC power supply through the cable glands, refer to chapter 8.13.
16.To connect the outputs, refer to chapter 8.14 and chapter 8.15.
17.Connect the functional earth conductor. See chapter 8.12.
18.If the display module or the Wi-Fi module is removed, connect it back.
19.Close the front and the top of the transmitter housing.
Fig. 28:

Wiring the device through the M20x1.5 cable glands in stainless steel

64

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Electrical installation

8.11

Wiring the device through the M20x1.5 cable glands innickel plated brass (device variant with cable glands)

Put only one cable in each cable gland.

→ Prepare cables that obey the specifications given
in chapter 8.6 and chapter 8.7.

→ To open the front of the transmitter, follow the
instructions given in chapter 8.9.

2 screws

1. Use a size 10 hexagonal key to loosen the 2screws of the functional earth plate.

2. Strip 100 mm of the cable.

8 mm

3. Reduce the shield to 20 mm.
4. Expose 8 mm of the conductors.
20 mm
100 mm ±55. Loosen the nut of the cable gland.
6. Remove the blind plug of the cable gland andstore the blind plug in a safe and clean place.
7. If the cable diameter is between 5 and 9 mm, put
the cable through the cable gland as shown in
the figure.
8. Use a size 24 hexagonal key to tighten the cablegland to a torque of 10 Nm (7.4 ft·lbf).
9. If the cable diameter is between 9 and 14 mm,→ vertically put a screwdriver between the twoseals,→ lift the inner seal and remove it.
→ Put the cable through the cable gland.
→ Use a size 24 hexagonal key to tighten the cablegland to a torque of 10 Nm (7.4 ft·lbf).

65

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Electrical installation

10.Attach each cable to the functional earth plate.
The shield must be in contact with the functional
earth plate.

11.Put the functional earth plate in its original place.
Functional earth

12.With an hexagonal key size 10, tighten the 2screws of the functional earth plate to a torque of
0.2 Nm (0.15 ft·lbf).

2 screws

IT IS NOT MANDATORY TO CONNECT
THE DEVICE TO A PROTECTIVE EARTH –MEANT FOR FUTURE USE
13.Put each conductor in the correct terminal of the terminal strip.
14.To connect the 12...35 V DC power supply through the cable glands, refer to chapter 8.13.
15.To connect the outputs, refer to chapter 8.14 and chapter 8.15.
16.Connect the functional earth conductor. See chapter 8.12.
17.If the display module or the Wi-Fi module is removed, connect it back.
18.Close the front and the top of the transmitter housing.
Fig. 29:

Wiring the device through the M20x1.5 cable glands in nickel plated brass

66

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Electrical installation

8.12

Connecting the functional earth (device variant with
two M20x1.5 cable glands)→ For a proper function of device always connect the yellow/green functional earth conductor:− either to the functional earth plate in the transmitter housing (see Fig. 31 in chapter 8.13),− or to the functional earth screw on the outer surface of the transmitter housing (see Fig. 30).
If you connect the conductor to the functional earth screw:→ Use a ring cable lug for M4 screw.
→ Tighten the M4 screw to a torque between 1.8...2 Nm (1.3...1.4 ft·lbf).

Fig. 30:

Functional earth screw on the outer surface of the device

8.13

Connecting the device to a 12...35 V DC power
supply through the M20x1.5 cable glands (device
variant with cable glands)

1. Use a 3.0 mm slot screwdriver (any length) and a force of max. 40 N to push the terminal 5 and disconnect the white conductor. Do not cut the white conductor.
2. Insulate the white conductor.
3. Connect the power supply as shown in Fig. 31.

67

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Electrical installation

To connect to the positive 12...35 V DC power supply forthe device through a cable gland
To connect to the negative power supply for the device
through a cable gland

Green LED flashes slowly
if the operation of thedevice is correct

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112

Internallyconnected to the
5-pin M12 maleconnector

Insulated white
conductor

To connect to the functional
earth through a cable gland

68

Fig. 31:

Connecting the 12...35 V DC power supply through the M20x1.5 cable glands

Fig. 32:

Device connected to a 12...35 V DC power supply through the M20x1.5 cable glands

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Electrical installation

8.14

Wiring output 1 (analogue) and output 3 configured
as an analogue output (device variant with cableglands)NOTICE
Risk of short-circuit if the configuration of output 3 is wrong.
▶ Before wiring output 3 as an analogue output, make sure output 3 is configured as an analogue output
in the Parameter menu of the outputs. See chapter 18.2 Changing the type of output 3.
An analogue output can be wired either in sourcing mode or in sinking mode.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112

- +Fig. 33:- +12-35 V DC

12-35 V DC

Power supply for
output 3

Power supply for
output 1+ -+ -4...20 mA input, atexternal instrument,
connected to output 3

4...20 mA input, atexternal instrument,
connected to output 1

Wiring the analogue outputs (left, sourcing; right, sinking)69

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Electrical installation

8.15

Wiring output 2 (digital) and output 3 configured as adigital output (device variant with cable glands)

NOTICE
Risk of short-circuit if the configuration of output 3 is wrong.
▶ Before wiring output 3 as a digital output, make sure output 3 is configured as a digital output in the
Parameter menu of the outputs. See chapter 18.2 Changing the type of output 3.
A digital output can be wired either in NPN mode or in PNP mode.
Orange LED is lit if therelated digital output isswitched to ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112

- +Fig. 34:- +12-35 V DC

12-35 V DC

Power supply for
output 3

Power supply for
output 2+ -+ -Load connected
to output 3

Load connected
to output 2

Wiring the digital outputs (left, NPN; right, PNP)

70

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Electrical installation

8.16

Knowing the status of the Ethernet network (device
variant with two 4-pin M12 female connectors –Ethernet device variant)

The status of the Ethernet network is indicated by LEDs. The LEDs are located on the industrial communication module in the transmitter housing.

→ To see the LEDs, open the front of the transmitter housing by removing either the blind cover or the
display module or the Wi-Fi module; see chapter 8.9.

X1

X2

Interface X1Interface X2(Ethernet Port Switch):
Link/Act LED (green)
Link LED (yellow)(Ethernet Port Switch):
Link LED (yellow)
Link/Act LED (green)

Connection to the PLC:
Error LED (yellow)
RUN LED (green)

Fig. 35:

Status LEDs for the industrial communication module

Description of the LEDs:
Table 17:

Status LED for the connection to the PLC

LED status
RUN LED (green)
ON
OFF
Table 18:

Connection status

What to do?

Connection active.
Connection not active.

Check cables

Status LEDs for the connection to the Ethernet network

LED status
Link/Act
LED

Error LED (yellow)
OFF
ON

ON

(green)Connection status

What to do?

Rapid flashing: connection to the higher-level protocol layer EtherNet/IP has been established. Data
is being transmitted.

-

Slow flashing: there is no connection to the protocol layer. This is usually the case for approx.
20 seconds following a restart.
OFF

No connection to the network is available.

Check cables

Link LED

ON

Connection to the network is available.

-(yellow)

OFF

No connection to the network is available.

Check cables

71

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Electrical installation

8.17

Specifications of the cables and conductors for the
4-pin M12 female connectors

Table 19:

Specifications of the cables and conductors for the 4-pin M12 female connectors

Specification of the cables and conductors
Electromagnetic protection (EMC)
Minimum category
Maximum length
Maximum operating temperature

8.18

Recommended value
Shielded conductor with minimum STP
CAT-5
100 m
80 °C or higher

Connecting the device to an Ethernet network(device variant with two 4-pin M12 female connectors– Ethernet device variant)

The two 4-pin M12 female connectors (D-coding) are used to connect the device to an Ethernet network.
Risk of damage to the device if any M12 connector is unused.
▶ Put a screwed plug on all the unused M12 connectors. Screw the plug of the 4-pin M12 female
connector to a torque of 1.3 Nm (0.96 ft·lbf).
If a device with two 4-pin M12 female connectors (Ethernet device variant) is connected to an Ethernet network, you must connect it to a büS / CANopen network for the configuration of the device
with the software Bürkert Communicator.
If a device is connected to an Ethernet network, the measured process values are transmitted via the Ethernet network.
Each 4-pin M12 female connector (D-coding) has the same pin assignment: See Fig. 36.

34• Pin 1: Transmit +• Pin 2: Receive +• Pin 3: Transmit –1

2
Fig. 36:• Pin 4: Receive –Pin assignment of the 4-pin M12 female connector→ Loosen the screwed plug of the 4-pin M12 female connector and store the screwed plug in a safe andclean place.

72

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Electrical installation

X1

X2
Cable and conductors
connected inside the device
from X1 to the upper 4-pin M12female connector
Cable and conductors
connected inside the device
from X2 to the middle 4-pin
M12 female connector

Cable and conductors connected
inside the device from the 12 push-in
terminal strip to the 5-pin M12 maleconnector
Fig. 37:

Wiring ex works of the device with two 4-pin M12 female connectors (Ethernet device variant)

8.19

Connecting the functional earth (device variant withtwo 4-pin M12 female connectors – Ethernet device
variant)

For a proper function of device always connect the yellow/green functional earth conductor to the functional
earth screw on the outer surface of the transmitter housing.

→ Use a ring cable lug for M4 screw.
→ Connect the functional earth conductor to the functional earth screw, see Fig. 38.
→ Tighten the M4 screw to a torque between 1.8...2 Nm (1.3...1.4 ft·lbf).

Fig. 38:

Functional earth screw on the outer surface of the device

73

englishType 8098 FLOWave L﻿74

englishType 8098 FLOWave L﻿Commissioning
9

COMMISSIONING.................................................................................................................................76
9.1

Safety instructions .....................................................................................................................76

9.2

Prerequisites ..............................................................................................................................76

9.3

First commissioning for measuring the flow rate or for filling containers................................76

9.4

First commissioning for detecting a change of liquid in the pipe ...........................................78

9.5

First commissioning for detecting bubbles in the pipe ............................................................7975

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Commissioning

9

COMMISSIONING

9.1

Safety instructions
WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-conforming commissioning.
Non-conforming commissioning could lead to injuries and damage the device and its surroundings.
▶ Before commissioning, make sure that the staff in charge have read and fully understood the contentsof the operating instructions.
▶ In particular, observe the safety recommendations and intended use.
▶ The device and the installation must only be commissioned by suitably trained staff.

9.2

Prerequisites• The device is installed into the pipe.
• The electrical installation of the device is performed. The device is correctly connected to the functional
earth.
• If the liquid is not water, then make sure that the optional features "DF measurement" and "Acoustic
transmission factor measurement" are activated.
• If the liquid is not water, then check its chemical compatibility with stainless steel.

9.3

First commissioning for measuring the flow rate or
for filling containers

1. Energise the device.
2. Connect the device to the Bürkert Communicator software. Print a pdf report of all the current settingsof the device. Select the process values that you want to monitor graphically. Refer to the Type 8920
Bürkert Communicator software from country.burkert.com.
3. On the display module, do the settings of the Quick start menu. Refer to chapter 11.2.
4. Make sure that the liquid to process is inside the device.
5. If the liquid is not water, then read out the value of the parameter Acoustic transmission factor. Refer tochapter 15.12.
• If the value is higher than 20 % ±5 %, then the flow rate of the liquid can be measured by the device.
• If the value is lower than 20 % ±5 %, then the flow rate of the liquid might not be measured accurately by
the device.
6. If the liquid is not water, then read out the value of the parameter DF. Refer to chapter 15.11.
• If the value is between 0.8 and 1.2, then the flow rate of the liquid can be measured by the device.

76• If the value is lower than 0.8 or higher than 1.2, then the flow rate of the liquid might not be measured
accurately by the device.

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Commissioning

7. Set the parameter Viscosity compensation for the liquid:• If the liquid is water, then make sure that the parameter Viscosity compensation is set to water. Refer tochapter 15.14.
• If the liquid has a kinematic viscosity that is between 0.5 and 2 mm2/s, then you can keep the parameter
Viscosity compensation to water. Refer to chapter 15.14.
• If the liquid is not water or if the liquid kinematic viscosity is lower than 0.5 or higher than 2 mm2/s, then
set the parameter Viscosity compensation to a value that is adapted to the liquid properties and to theprocess conditions. Refer to chapter 15.14.
8. Set the parameter Refresh time to Short. Refer to chapter 15.15.
9. To monitor the volume flow rate, set the parameter Damping of the volume flow rate:• To measure a stable volume flow rate or to conduct a teach-in procedure depending on the volume flowrate Teach-in by volume flow, set the parameter Damping of the volume flow rate to Medium. Refer tochapter 15.4.2 or 15.4.3.
• To fill containers accurately or to conduct a Teach-in by volume, set the parameter Damping of volume
flow rate to None. Refer to chapter 15.4.4.
10. To monitor the mass flow rate, set the parameter Damping of the mass flow rate:• To measure a stable mass flow rate or to conduct a teach-in procedure depending on the mass flowrate Teach-in by mass flow rate, set the parameter Damping of the mass flow rate to Medium. Refer tochapter 15.5.2 or 15.5.3. Set the parameter Damping of the density to Medium. Refer to chapter 15.8.4.
• To fill containers accurately or to conduct a Teach-in by mass, set the parameter Damping of density toNone. Refer to chapter 15.8.4.
11. To monitor the volume flow rate, make sure that the volume flow Cut-off function is active and set the
Cut-off value. Refer to chapter 15.4.9 or 15.4.10.
12. To monitor the mass flow rate, make sure that the mass flow Cut-off function is active and set the
Cut-off value. Refer to chapter 15.5.9 or 15.5.10.
13. To monitor the mass flow rate, calibrate Density by either using a teach-in procedure, either setting
offset and slope value of density. Refer to chapter 17.19.
14. Set the parameter K factor. Refer to chapter 17.7. The K factor applies to both process values volume
flow rate and mass flow rate.
15. There can be negative flows at the start or end of a batching step. By default, the counting directionsof the volume totalizers and mass totalizers and of the pulse outputs are set to Positive only and will
not take backwards flows into account. If necessary, depending on the rest of the batching system,
set the counting directions to Both directions. Refer to chapter 15.7.2 for volume totalizer, refer tochapter 18.5.4 for pulse output, refer to chapter 15.10.2 for mass totalizer.
16. Check the correct behaviour of the device by using the menu Simulation. Refer to chapter 17.24.
17. With the Bürkert Communicator software, print a pdf report of the new settings of the device.
18. Select the process values that you want to save and export the selected data under the format(*.edipdb). Refer to the Type 8920 Operating Instructions.
19. Disconnect the Bürkert Communicator software from the device.
77

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Commissioning

9.4

First commissioning for detecting a change of liquidin the pipe

1. Energise the device.
2. Connect the device to the Bürkert Communicator software. Print a pdf report of all the current settingsof the device. Select the process values that you want to monitor graphically. Refer to the Type 8920
Bürkert Communicator software from country.burkert.com.
3. On the display module, do the settings of the Quick start menu. Refer to chapter 11.2.
4. If the liquid is not water, then read out the value of the Acoustic transmission factor. Refer tochapter 15.12.
• If the value is higher than 20 % ±5 %, then the flow rate of the liquid can be measured by the device.
• If the value is lower than 20 % ±5 %, then the flow rate of the liquid might not be measured accurately by
the device.
5. If the liquid is not water, then read out the value of the DF. Refer to chapter 15.11.
• If the value is between 0.8 and 1.2, then the flow rate of the liquid can be measured by the device.
• If the value is lower than 0.8 or higher than 1.2, then the flow rate of the liquid might not be measured
accurately by the device.
6. Adjust the parameter Damping of the acoustic transmission factor, depending on your application. Referto chapter 15.12.3 or 15.12.4.
7. Adjust the parameter Damping of the DF, depending on your application. Refer to chapter 15.11.3 or
15.11.4.
8. Check the correct behaviour of the device by using the menu Simulation. Refer to chapter 17.24.
9. With the Bürkert Communicator software, print a pdf report of the new settings of the device.
10. Select the process values that you want to save and export the selected data under the format(*.edipdb). Refer to the Type 8920 Operating Instructions.
11. Disconnect the Bürkert Communicator software from the device.

78

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Commissioning

9.5

First commissioning for detecting bubbles in the pipe

1. Energise the device.
2. Connect the device to the Bürkert Communicator software. Print a pdf report of all the current settingsof the device. Select the process values that you want to monitor graphically. Refer to the Type 8920
Bürkert Communicator software from country.burkert.com.
3. On the display module, do the settings of the Quick start menu. Refer to chapter 11.2.
4. If the liquid is not water, then read out the value of the Acoustic transmission factor. Refer tochapter 15.12.
• If the value is higher than 20 % ±5 %, then the flow rate of the liquid can be measured by the device.
Refer to chapter 15.11.
• If the value is lower than 20 % ±5 %, then the flow rate of the liquid might not be measured accurately by
the device.
5. If the liquid is not water, then read out the value of the DF. Refer to chapter 15.11.
• If the value is between 0.8 and 1.2, then the flow rate of the liquid can be measured by the device.
• If the value is lower than 0.8 or higher than 1.2, then the flow rate of the liquid might not be measured
accurately by the device.
6. Adjust the parameter Damping of the acoustic transmission factor, depending on your application. Referto chapter 15.11.3 or 15.11.4.
7. Check the correct behaviour of the device by using the menu Simulation. Refer to chapter 17.24.
8. With the Bürkert Communicator software, print a pdf report of the new settings of the device.
9. Select the process values that you want to save and export the selected data under the format(*.edipdb). Refer to the Type 8920 Operating Instructions.
10. Disconnect the Bürkert Communicator software from the device.

79

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Commissioning80

englishType 8098 FLOWave L﻿Doing the settings
10

HOW TO DO THE SETTINGS................................................................................................................82
10.1 Safety instructions......................................................................................................................82
10.2 Available software to do the settings.........................................................................................82
10.3 Connect the device to the Bürkert Communicator software....................................................82
10.4 Display module: description of the user interface.....................................................................84
10.4.1

Description of the display..........................................................................................85

10.4.2

How to use the touch sensitive keys.........................................................................86

10.4.3

Minimum and maximum values when entering a numerical value...........................86

10.5 Available login user levels..........................................................................................................86
10.6 Default settings...........................................................................................................................87
10.7 Menu structure............................................................................................................................88
10.7.1

Opening or closing the context menu in any view (display module only)................89

10.7.2

Adding your own context menu items (shortcuts, display module only).................90

10.7.3

Reading out the messages generated by the device...............................................91

10.7.4

Changing the login user level if the adjustment is not protected throughpasswords...................................................................................................................91

10.7.5

Changing the login user level if the adjustment is protected through passwords..92

10.7.6

Logging out from the Advanced user, Installer or Bürkert user level......................92

10.7.7

Reading out the access path to a menu item (display module only).......................93

10.8 How to navigate in the menus and to adjust values.................................................................93
10.8.1

Adjusting a percentage or selecting a value in a list................................................93

10.8.2

Navigating in a wizard and adjusting numbers.........................................................94

10.8.3

Setting negative or positive numbers........................................................................95

10.8.4Entering a name..........................................................................................................96

10.8.5

Activating or deactivating a feature...........................................................................9781

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
How to do the settings

10

HOW TO DO THE SETTINGS

10.1

Safety instructions

WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-conforming adjustment.
Non-conforming adjustment could lead to injury and damage the device and its surroundings.
▶ The operators in charge of adjustment must have read and understood the contents of the Operating
Instructions.
▶ In particular, observe the safety recommendations and intended use.
▶ The device/installation must only be adjusted by suitably trained staff.

10.2

Available software to do the settings

The settings of the device can be done with:• the Type ME31 display module. The device can be equipped with a display module or not.
• the Type 8920 Bürkert Communicator software, which must be installed on a PC.
The menu structure is the same in the display module and in the Bürkert Communicator software.

→ To do the settings of the device with the Type ME31 display module, refer to the next chapters of these
Operating Instructions, starting with chapter 10.4 Display module: description of the user interface.

→ To use the Bürkert Communicator software, first prepare the necessary hardware and the software. Refer tochapter 10.3. Then do the settings as described in these Operating Instructions, starting with chapter 10.4.3
Minimum and maximum values when entering a numerical value.

→ To use some specific functions that are only available with the Bürkert Communicator software, refer tothe Type 8920 Operating Instructions, available on the internet at country.burkert.com.

→ To get detailed information on the software of the Type ME31 display module, refer to the related Operating Instructions, available on the internet at country.burkert.com.

10.3

Connect the device to the Bürkert Communicator
software

To do the settings with the Type 8920 Bürkert Communicator software, do the following steps:
1. Buy the USB-büS interface set with article number 772426 from Bürkert.
2. Download the latest version of the Type 8920 Bürkert Communicator software from country.burkert.com.
3. Install the Bürkert Communicator software on a PC. Obey the installation recommendations given in theUSB-büS interface set. During installation, the büS stick must not be inserted at the PC.
4. Screw the termination resistance into the Y plug or activate the device internal termination resistor (seechapter 12.6.3).

82

The internal termination resistor is no more available after 12/2022. Nevertheless it could happen
that the termination resistor activation menu is still visible on the display.

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
How to do the settings

5. Screw the female M12 connector at the end of the delivered cable into the Y plug.
6. Insert the mini-USB of the cable into the delivered büS stick.
Do not insert the mini-USB of the cable into any equipment other than the büS stick.
7. Insert the appropriate power adapter into the AC/DC adapter.
8. Connect the cable of the AC/DC adapter to the related connector of the female M12 connector.
Termination
resistanceFemale M12connector

büS stickY plugPower adapter

AC/DC adapter
Mini-USB

Cable of the AC/DC adapter

Fig. 39:

Assembled connection cables, plugs and büS stick

9. Screw the Y plug on the male M12 connector of the device.
10.Insert the büS stick into a USB port of the PC.
11.Wait until the Windows pilot of the büS stick has been completely installed on the PC.
12.Connect the AC/DC adapter to the power supply.
13.Start the Bürkert Communicator software.
14.Click onin the Bürkert Communicator software to establish the communication between the Bürkert
Communicator software and the device. A window opens.
15.Select büS-Stick.
16.Choose the port Bürkert büS Stick, click on Finish and wait until the device symbol appears in the listof devices.
17.In the list of devices, click on the symbol related to the device. The menu structure for the device isdisplayed.

english83

Type 8098 FLOWave L
How to do the settings

10.4

Display module: description of the user interface

To get detailed information on the display software, refer to the Operating Instructions of the Type
ME31 display software, available on the internet at country.burkert.com.
The user interface is made up of a display and touch sensitive keys.

BACK key
Fig. 40:

30.1
l/min

Navigation keys OK key

Overview of the user interface

84

englishDisplay

Volume flow
View 2CONFIGURATION

View 1 of 4

Type 8098 FLOWave L
How to do the settings

10.4.1

Description of the display

Symbol of the device
statusSymbol of the active user level. See chapter 10.5.
Information bar

Display

Brightness
Contrast

56 %
64 %

Screen saver[+]

MAINTENANCE

To the DIAGNOSTICS menu,
by pressing

DIAGNOSTICS

Parameter

Name of the customized view or of the menu

SAW sensor

Title of the menu or of
the menu item

Stand. meas. values [+]Add. meas. values [+]Diag. events[+]

Refresh timeLong

MAINTENANCEDIAGNOSTICS

Parameter

To the MAINTENANCE menu, bypressing

More menu items are available
The symbol [+] at the end of a menu item means that sub-menu items are available.
Fig. 41:

Description of the display (examples)85

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
How to do the settings

10.4.2

How to use the touch sensitive keys

The highlighted terms are related to menus or menu items.
Table 20:

Key

How to use the keys

Description
Short press: to go back to the parent menu or to the parent view. This key is called BACK in
the display messages.
If the user makes changes but does not save these, then a message is displayed asking if
the changes should be saved.
Long press: to go back to View 1
If one or both keys are displayed:• To switch between views, from the left to the right and vice versa. Only possible
between the views that can be customized and the CONFIGURATION view, andbetween the Diagnostics, Parameter and Maintenance views.
• To select the digit to the left or the digit to the right when you are asked to enter avalue.
• To select a Menu item.
• To select an option or to change a value.
This key is called OK in the display messages.
Short press:• To confirm a selection.
• To save a choice.
• To go to the next screen of the wizard.
Long press: to open the context menu

10.4.3

Minimum and maximum values when entering a numericalvalue

When you are requested to enter or to change a numerical value, the minimum and maximum authorized
values are always displayed.

10.5

Available login user levels

The following 4 login user levels are available to operate or adjust the device:• the basic user level, which is the level with the least functions,• the Advanced User user level,• the Installer user level (default),• the Bürkert user level.
By default, the device adjustment is not protected by passwords.
86

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
How to do the settings

Table 21 shows the symbol displayed in the information bar, depending on the user level that is active on
the device, and what can be done with each type of user level.
Table 21:

Possible login user levels

User level

Symbol1)

Description• No password is required.

No symbol

Basic user

• The menu items with the symbol

enable read-only access.

• Not all the menu items that are available with a higher user level are
displayed.
• Password required, if the password protection is active (see chapter 12.15).
Default password is 005678.
Advanceduser• The menu items with the symbol

enable read-only access.

• Not all the menu items that are available with a higher user level are
displayed.
• Password required, if the password protection is active (see chapter 12.15).
Default password is 001946.
Installer• This level is active by default (and by default, password protection isswitched off).
• All the available menu items can be adjusted.
• Password required, if the password protection is active (see chapter 12.15).

Bürkert1)• Only for Bürkert service.

displayed in the information bar, only if the adjustment is protected through passwords.

→ If you have forgotten your passwords, you can restore the default passwords with the Type 8920 Bürkert
Communicator software. Refer to the related Operating Instructions.

10.6

Default settings

You can find the default settings of the device in the CANopen supplement for the Type 8098 FLOWave L atcountry.burkert.com.

→ Before making any changes to the settings, use the Bürkert Communicator software to print a pdf filewith all the default settings of the device.

87

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
How to do the settings

10.7

Menu structure
View 1 of 4
CONFIGURATION

To navigate through the listof available menu items

SAW sensor

Volume flow

30.1

View 2F

View 1

Level 1CONFIGURATION

l/min

T

Configuration viewFirst view, displayed after
energizing the device, thatcan be changed by the user

Press to access the displayedmenu item (for example, theitem "SAW sensor")

SAW sensor

Diagnostics

Parameter

Maintenance

[+]
[+]

Sensor[+]Stand. meas. values [+]Add. meas. values [+]Diag. events[+]

Refresh timeLong

MAINTENANCE

DeviceDiag. events

PARAMETER

SAW sensor

DIAGNOSTICS

SAW sensor

PARAMETER

Level 2

Long press, from any viewDevice information [+]Flow direction Standa...
[+]Simulation[+]

Diagnostics view

Parameter view

Maintenance view

Reading out the values
related to the diagnostics

Reading out or setting theparameters

Reading out or setting
the values related to themaintenance* To display the next 3 views that can be added and changed by the user.

Fig. 42:

Calibration

Menu structure of the FLOWave

A context menu can be opened in any view: see chapter 10.7.1.
88

english*Type 8098 FLOWave L
How to do the settings

10.7.1

Opening or closing the context menu in any view (display
module only)

The user can open a context menu in any view. The content depends on the active view.
To open the context menu:→ Press and hold.

The context menu is open.
To close the context menu without leaving the active view:→ Press.

The context menu is closed.
Context menu content depending on the view:
Table 22:

Context menu depending on the view

View

Menu items of the context menu
Messages overview
Add new view
Delete this view

Views 1 to 4

To display the list of messages generated by the device. See
chapter 10.7.3.
To add a new view or to delete the displayed view.

Change layout

To choose to display 1, 2 or 4 values or a trend of 1 or 2
values.

Change title

To change the title of the displayed view.

Change value

To change the value(s) or the units of the values displayed in
the view.

Change unit

Not available for trends.
Fractional digits
Change user level

To choose whether a value of the view is displayed as awhole number or with one or more decimals.
To change the user level. See chapter 10.7.4 orchapter 10.7.5.

Messages overview To display the list of messages generated by the device.
CONFIGURATION
Change user level

To change the user level.

Messages overview To display the list of messages generated by the device.
To display the access path to the displayed menu item. See
chapter 10.7.7.

Parameter

Where am I?

Maintenance

Add shortcut

Diagnostics

Delete shortcut

To create or delete your own context menu items (seechapter 10.7.2).

Change user level

To change the user level.

89

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
How to do the settings

View

Menu items of the context menu
Messages overview To display the list of messages generated by the device.

In a menu

Save

To save the changes.

Where am I?

To display the access path to the displayed menu item. Not
available in the wizard.

Add shortcut

10.7.2

Delete shortcut

To create or delete your own context menu items (seechapter 10.7.2).

Change user level

To change the user level.

Adding your own context menu items (shortcuts, display
module only)

If you are in the Parameter, Maintenance or Diagnostics view or in a menu, you can add up to 3 shortcuts
to the context menu. These shortcuts then appear in every context menu and allow the user to jump directly
to the selected view or menu item.
Parameter

Language
EnglishWhere am I?
GermanChange user level
FrenchTOT 1> RESET

Fig. 43:

Example of a shortcut

Shortcut example

To add a shortcut to the context menu:→ Go to the view or menu for which a shortcut should be created.
→ Press and hold→to open the context menu.

Add shortcut→ Enter a name for this shortcut: see chapter 10.8.4 Entering a name.
→OK to confirm the name entered.

Save.

The shortcut to this view or to this menu is added to the context menu.

90

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
How to do the settings

To delete a shortcut from the context menu:→ Press and holdto open the context menu.

→ By using the shortcut to be deleted, go to the view or menu item.
→ Press and hold→to open the context menu.

Delete shortcut

Confirm.

The shortcut to this view or to this menu item is deleted from the context menu.

10.7.3

Reading out the messages generated by the device

The device generates messages to inform you, for example, that a problem has occurred or that a process
value limit has been reached.

→ To read out the messages in the Bürkert Communicator software, refer to the Operating Instructions
Type 8920, available on the internet at country.burkert.com.

Do the following to display the generated messages on the display module:→Long press, to open the context menu.

→

Messages overview

Confirm.

The generated messages are displayed. Some messages can be acknowledged.

10.7.4

Changing the login user level if the adjustment is notprotected through passwords

By default:• the Installer user level is active on the device,• the adjustment is not protected through passwords,• the symbol related to the Installer user level is not displayed in the information bar.
You can only change to the Bürkert user level.

→ To change the login user level in the Bürkert Communicator software, refer to the Operating Instructions
Type 8920, available on the internet at country.burkert.com.

Do the following to change the login user level on the display module:→Long press, to open the context menu.

→

Change user level→

Choose the Bürkert user level→

Enter the password

Confirm.
Confirm.
Confirm.

The user level is changed.

→ To activate the adjustment protection through passwords, refer to chapter 12.15.

english91

Type 8098 FLOWave L
How to do the settings

10.7.5

Changing the login user level if the adjustment is protected
through passwords

If the adjustment is protected through passwords, the symbol related to the active user level is displayed in
the information bar.

→ To change the login user level in the Bürkert Communicator software, refer to the Operating Instructions
Type 8920, available on the internet at country.burkert.com.

Do the following to change the login user level on the display module:→Long press, to open the context menu.

→

Change user level→

Choose Logout (not available if the basic user is logged in)→Long press, to open the context menu.

→

Change user level→

Choose the user level→

Enter the password

Confirm.
Confirm.

Confirm.
Confirm.
Confirm.

The user level is changed. The related symbol is displayed in the information bar.

→ To deactivate the adjustment protection through passwords, refer to chapter 12.17.
10.7.6

Logging out from the Advanced user, Installer or Bürkert user level

If the adjustment is protected through passwords:• the symbol related to the active user level is displayed in the information bar.
• you are automatically logged out after the activation delay of the screen saver has elapsed.

→ To log out from the active user level in the Bürkert Communicator software, refer to the Operating
Instructions Type 8920, available on the internet at country.burkert.com.

Do the following to log out from the Advanced user, the Installer or the Bürkert user level and to go to thebasic user level:→

Long press, to open the context menu.

→

Change user level→

Choose Logout
The basic user level is active.

92

englishConfirm.
Confirm.

Type 8098 FLOWave L
How to do the settings

10.7.7

Reading out the access path to a menu item (display module
only)

If you are lost in the menu structure, you can display the access path.

→

Long press, to open the context menu.

→

Where am I?

Confirm.

Read out the access path to the displayed menu item.

10.8

How to navigate in the menus and to adjust values

10.8.1

Adjusting a percentage or selecting a value in a list
Display

Parameter
56 %
64 %

Screen saver[+]

MAINTENANCE

Brightness
Contrast

SelectConfirm
Display
Brightness%
70
0AdjustSave

SelectSave

100

Display
Contrast
%
0

100
100

Screen saver
Wait time
2 minutes
5 minutes
15 minutes
30 minutes

Fig. 44:

Adjusting a percentage or selecting a value in a list
93

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
How to do the settings

10.8.2

Navigating in a wizard and adjusting numbers
General settings

Quick start
Diagnostics

[+]


Date and timeLanguage

EnglishMAINTENANCEDIAGNOSTICS

Parameter

Confirm
Parameter
Current date/time 1/9
Current date:08/24/15
Current time:08:57:16
Daylight savings
Current time zone:+00:London

Go back to the previous screen (available at each step of
the wizard)
Confirm to go to the next screen. Adjust the values.
ParameterYear

4/9
max: 2099

2015
min: 2000

Adjust selected
digit

Select a digit

Confirm to go to the next screen. Adjust the values.
Parameter
New date/time
9/9
New date:09/22/15
New time:08:57:16
Daylight savings
New time zone:+00:London

Save

Fig. 45:

Navigating in a wizard and adjusting numbers

94

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
How to do the settings

10.8.3

Setting negative or positive numbers

Settings
Error low

3/7
max: 150.00-020.000
min: -20.00

To set a positive number:→to increase the number until the positive value is reached.

Settings
Error low

3/7
max: 150.00

010.000
min: -20.00

To set a negative number:→
Fig. 46:

to decrease the number until the negative value is reached.
Setting negative or positive numbers

95

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
How to do the settings

10.8.4Entering a nameSAW sensor

Stand. meas. values [+]Add. meas. values [+]Diag. events[+]

Refresh timeLong

MAINTENANCEDIAGNOSTICS

Parameter

Confirm
SAW sensor

Stand. meas. values
Volume flow
Temperature

[+]
[+]

Liquid velocity[+]

Totalizer 1[+]
Confirm

SAW sensor

Volume flow
Value name Volume flow
DampingLimits[+]Cut-off[+]
Confirm

Volume flow

Value nameGo to character

Volume flow
Q W

E

R

T

Y

U

I

O

P

A

S

D

F

G

H

J

K

L

Z

X

C

V

B

N

M

,

.

_

abc

Fig. 47:

DEL

SPACE

.?123 OKEntering a name96

englishConfirm
selected
character

Go to OK

Save the nameType 8098 FLOWave L
How to do the settings

10.8.5

Activating or deactivating a feature
General settings

Date and Time

Language

EnglishPasswords[+]

Physical units[+]

MAINTENANCEDIAGNOSTICS

Parameter

Confirm

Parameter

Passwords
Password protection

Off

Confirm
Passwords

Password protection

Deactivate / Activate

Save

Off

Fig. 48:

Activating or deactivating a feature97

englishType 8098 FLOWave L﻿98englishType 8098 FLOWave L﻿Menu Display
11

DISPLAY MODULE SETTINGS...........................................................................................................100
11.1 Safety instructions....................................................................................................................100
11.2 Doing the Quick start adjustments when energizing the device for the first time(display module only)................................................................................................................100
11.3 Menu Parameter........................................................................................................................101
11.3.1

Adjusting the brightness of the display backlight...................................................101

11.3.2Adjusting the contrast of the display.......................................................................101

11.3.3Adjusting the activation delay of the screen saver.................................................102

11.3.4

Adjusting the brightness of the backlight by active screen saver.........................102

11.3.5

Unlocking the screen saver......................................................................................103

11.3.6

Changing the unlock sequence of the screen saver...............................................103

11.4 Menu Diagnostics.....................................................................................................................104
11.4.1

Reading out the temperature of the display module..............................................104

11.5 Menu Maintenance...................................................................................................................104
11.5.1

Reading out the version number of the software of the display module...............104

11.5.2

Reading out the version number of the hardware of the display module..............105

11.5.3

Reading out the article number of the display module...........................................105

11.5.4

Reading out the article number of the display module software...........................106

11.5.5

Reading out the serial number of the display module............................................106

99

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Display module settings

11

DISPLAY MODULE SETTINGS

The section describes the menus related to the display module which is fitted on the device.

11.1

Safety instructions
WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-conforming adjustment.
Non-conforming adjustment could lead to injury and damage the device and its surroundings.
▶ The operators in charge of adjustment must have read and understood the contents of the Operating
Instructions.
▶ In particular, observe the safety recommendations and intended use.
▶ The device/installation must only be adjusted by suitably trained staff.

11.2

Doing the Quick start adjustments when energizing
the device for the first time (display module only)

When the device is energized for the first time, the user is guided to make the following mandatory settings:• choosing the display language,• choosing the time zone,• choosing whether daylight saving (summer time) is automatically taken into account or not,• setting the date and time,• choosing the unit system for all the measurements.
When the device has finished the uploading step, the first screen of the Quick start is displayed.

→→

Display
Choose the display language
the chosen language.

Confirm. The current date and time settings are displayed in→

Choose the time zone→

Choose whether daylight saving (summer time) is automatically taken into account (On) or not (Off)Confirm.

for the display of the time.

100→

Set the year→

Set the month→

Set the day→

Set the hours→

Set the minutes

Confirm.
Confirm.
Confirm.
Confirm.
Confirm.
Confirm. The new date and time settings are displayed.

→

Choose the unit system for all the measurements→

Save the Quick start settings or

englishConfirm.

go back to the parent menu without saving the new settings.

Type 8098 FLOWave L
Display module settings

11.3

Menu Parameter

11.3.1

Adjusting the brightness of the display backlight

The brightness of the display is automatically reduced if the internal device temperature is higher
than +60 °C.
If the internal device temperature is higher than +60 °C, the brightness of the display is automatically reduced to 50 % and the backlight is even switched off 5 minutes after the last operation. If thetemperature is higher than 80 °C the backlight is automatically switched off (0 %). If the display isoperated, the backlight is put on for 30 s with a brightness of 50 %.
You can set 2 different values for the backlight brightness:• 1 value if the screen saver is inactive,• 1 value if the screen saver is active. Refer to chapter 11.3.4.
To set the backlight brightness if the screen saver is inactive, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Display→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Brightness→

Adjust the brightness of the backlight.

→

Save.
The brightness of the backlight is adjusted.

11.3.2Adjusting the contrast of the display→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Display→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Contrast→

Adjust the contrast.

→

Save.
The contrast of the display is adjusted.

101

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Display module settings

11.3.3Adjusting the activation delay of the screen saver

The screen saver allows you to:• Save energy.
• Automatically go back to View 1.
• And, if the adjustment is protected through passwords, to be automatically logged out from an Advanced
user, an Installer or a Bürkert user level after the activation delay of the screen saver has elapsed.

→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Display→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Screen saver→

Wait time→

Choose the time of inactivity of the display after which the screen saver is activated.

.
.

Save.
The activation delay of the screen saver is adjusted.

11.3.4

Adjusting the brightness of the backlight by active screen
saver

You can set 2 different values for the backlight brightness:• 1 value if the screen saver is inactive, refer to chapter 11.3.1.
• 1 value if the screen saver is active.
To set the backlight brightness if the screen saver is active, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Display→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Screen saver→

Brightness→

Adjust the brightness of the backlight.

.

The brightness of the backlight is adjusted.

102

englishSave.

Type 8098 FLOWave L
Display module settings

11.3.5

Unlocking the screen saver

To unlock the display when the screen saver is active, do the following to have access to any view again:→ Press any key twice.
The first key of the unlock sequence is displayed.

→ Press the displayed key.
→ Follow the displayed instructions.
You have access to the display views and the screen saver time-out is restarted.
The default unlock sequence is the following:→→→→→ To change the unlock sequence, refer to chapter 11.3.6.
11.3.6

Changing the unlock sequence of the screen saver

Do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Display→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Screen saver→

Screen saver unlock sequence→

Choose the number of key presses.

→

Choose which key is pressed first.

→

Choose which key is pressed second.

→

Choose which key is pressed next, etc.

→

Save.

.

The key sequence is changed.

103

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Display module settings

11.4

Menu Diagnostics

11.4.1

Reading out the temperature of the display module

To read out the temperature of the display module, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Display→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→

Temperature→

Device temperature→

Go back to the parent menu.

The temperature of the display module is displayed.

11.5

Menu Maintenance

11.5.1

Reading out the version number of the software of the display
moduleTo read out the version number of the software of the display module, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Display→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Version numbers→

Software version
displayed.

→

Go back to the parent menu.

104

englishThe version number of the software of the display module isType 8098 FLOWave L
Display module settings

11.5.2

Reading out the version number of the hardware of the display
moduleTo read out the version number of the hardware of the display module, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Display→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Version numbers→

Hardware version
displayed.

→

The version number of the hardware of the display module isGo back to the parent menu.

11.5.3

Reading out the article number of the display module

To read out the article number of the display module, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Display→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Version numbers→

Ident. number→

Go back to the parent menu.

The article number of the display module is displayed.

105

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Display module settings

11.5.4

Reading out the article number of the display module software

To read out the article number of the display module software, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Display→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→→→

Version numbers
The article number of the display module software is

Software ident. number
displayed.
Go back to the parent menu.

11.5.5

Reading out the serial number of the display module

To read out the serial number of the display module, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Display→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Version numbers→

Serial number→

Go back to the parent menu.

106

englishThe serial number of the display module is displayed.

Type 8098 FLOWave L﻿Menu General settings
12

GENERAL SETTINGS – PARAMETER................................................................................................110
12.1 Safety instructions....................................................................................................................11012.2 User levels of the editable menu items ...................................................................................110
12.3 Default settings.........................................................................................................................11012.4 Changing the operating mode of the device status indicator or switching off thedevice status indicator.............................................................................................................111
12.4.1

Changing the operating mode of the device status indicator................................111

12.4.2

Switching off the device status indicator................................................................111

12.5 Setting the basic parameters for identifying the device on büS.............................................112
12.5.1Entering a name for the device................................................................................112

12.5.2Entering the location of the device..........................................................................112

12.5.3Entering a description for the device.......................................................................113

12.6 Setting the advanced parameters for identifying the device connected to büS or to a
CANopen bus............................................................................................................................113
12.6.1Entering a unique name for the device....................................................................113

12.6.2

Changing the transmission speed on the device....................................................114

12.6.3

Activating the device internal termination resistor..................................................114

12.6.4

Deactivating the device internal termination resistor.............................................115

12.6.5

Changing the address of the device connected to a CANopen bus......................115

12.6.6

Setting the digital communication for büS or for a CANopen bus.........................116

12.6.7

Stop sending the measured process data (PDOs) to büS or to the CANopen fieldbus............................................................................................................117

12.7 Monitoring the device supply voltage or the device temperature..........................................117
12.7.1

Reading out the 2 error limit values.........................................................................119

12.7.2

Changing the 2 warning limit values........................................................................119

12.7.3

Reading out the hysteresis value.............................................................................119

12.8 Reading out the low warning limit for the voltage of the internal battery..............................120
12.9 Start-up – Doing the basic settings.........................................................................................120
12.10 Activating the diagnostics function..........................................................................................121
12.11 Disabling all the diagnostics....................................................................................................122
12.12 Configuration provider..............................................................................................................122
12.12.1

Reading out the status of the configuration provider.............................................123

12.12.2

Replacing the data of the configuration memory....................................................124

12.12.3

Transferring the configuration data of all the modules...........................................124

english107

Type 8098 FLOWave L﻿

12.13 Changing the date and the time ..............................................................................................125
12.14 Changing the display language ...............................................................................................125
12.15 Activating the adjustment protection through passwords .....................................................126
12.16 Changing the protection passwords of the Advanced user and Installer user levels .........126
12.17 Deactivating the adjustment protection through passwords ................................................127
12.18 Changing the units of the physical quantities ........................................................................127
12.19 Displaying the text -- (NaN) or a numerical value ...................................................................128
13

GENERAL SETTINGS – DIAGNOSTICS..............................................................................................129
13.1 User levels of the menu items..................................................................................................129
13.2 Reading out data related to the device....................................................................................129
13.2.1

Reading out the number of operating hours of the device.....................................129

13.2.2

Reading out the current value of the internal temperature of the device..............130

13.2.3

Reading out the minimum or the maximum value of the internal temperature of the device......................................................................................................130

13.2.4

Reading out the current value of the supply voltage..............................................130

13.2.5

Reading out the minimum or the maximum value of the supply voltage...............131

13.2.6

Reading out the current value of the current consumption of the device.............131

13.2.7

Reading out the minimum or the maximum value of the current consumption of the device.............................................................................................132

13.2.8

Reading out the number of device starts................................................................132

13.2.9Reading out the status of the configuration memory.............................................132

13.2.10Checking whether the date and time are correct....................................................133

13.2.11Checking the voltage of the internal battery...........................................................133

13.3 Reading out data related to büS..............................................................................................134
13.3.1

Reading out the number of current receive errors..................................................134

13.3.2

Reading out the maximum number of receive errors since the last powerup of the device........................................................................................................134

13.3.3

Reading out the number of current transmit errors................................................134

13.3.4

Reading out the maximum number of transmit errors since the last
power-up of the device............................................................................................135

13.3.5

Resetting the 2 maximum error counters................................................................135

13.3.6

Reading out whether the measured process data (PDO, process data
object) is sent on büS or on the CANopen fieldbus................................................135

108

englishType 8098 FLOWave L﻿

13.4 Configuration provider information..........................................................................................136

14

13.4.1

Reading out the current status of the configuration provider................................136

13.4.2

Reading out the number of loaded client (module) configurations........................137

13.4.3

Reading out the number of reconfigured clients (modules)...................................137

13.4.4

Reading out the number of managed modules.......................................................137

13.4.5

Reading out the number of missing modules.........................................................138

13.4.6

Reading out the number of failed configuration loads...........................................138

13.4.7

Reading out the number of failed reconfigurations................................................139

13.4.8Erasing the configuration data of a single module.................................................139

GENERAL SETTINGS – MAINTENANCE............................................................................................140
14.1 User levels of the menu items..................................................................................................140
14.2 Reading out some device information.....................................................................................140
14.2.1

Reading out the displayed name of the device.......................................................140

14.2.2

Reading out the article number of the device.........................................................140

14.2.3

Reading out the serial number of the device..........................................................141

14.2.4

Reading out the article number of the device software..........................................141

14.2.5

Reading out the version number of the device software........................................141

14.2.6

Reading out the version number of the büS software............................................142

14.2.7

Reading out the version number of the device hardware.......................................142

14.2.8

Reading out the Type number of the device...........................................................142

14.2.9Reading out the manufacturing date of the device.................................................143

14.2.10

Reading out the version of the embedded eds file.................................................143

14.3 Resetting the device.................................................................................................................144
14.3.1

Restarting the device...............................................................................................144

14.3.2

Resetting the device to all its factory settings........................................................144

14.3.3Updating the menu configuration of the device......................................................145

109

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Parameter

12

GENERAL SETTINGS – PARAMETER

12.1

Safety instructions

WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-conforming adjustment.
Non-conforming adjustment could lead to injury and damage the device and its surroundings.
▶ The operators in charge of adjustment must have read and understood the contents of the Operating
Instructions.
▶ In particular, observe the safety recommendations and intended use.
▶ The device/installation must only be adjusted by suitably trained staff.

12.2

User levels of the editable menu items

Menu item of the General settings – Parameter menu
Status LED
büS – Displayed namebüS – Location
büS – Description
büS – Advanced
Alarm limits, except error limits
Alarm limits, error limits
Quick start
Diagnostics
Configuration provider
NaN Replacement
Date and time
Language
Passwords
Physical units

12.3

Minimum user level
Installer
Advanced user
Advanced user
Advanced user
Installer
Installer
BürkertInstaller
Installer
Installer
Installer
Installer
Advanced user
Installer
Advanced user

Default settings

You can find the default settings of the device in the CANopen supplement for the Type 8098 FLOWave L atcountry.burkert.com.

→ Before making any changes to the settings, use the Bürkert Communicator software to print a pdf filewith all the default settings of the device.

110

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Parameter

12.4

Changing the operating mode of the device statusindicator or switching off the device status indicator

By default, the device status indicator operates according to the NAMUR NE 107 standard (NAMUR mode).
The following other operating modes of the device status indicator are available:• Fixed color: choose the permanent colour of the device status indicator.
• LED off: the device status indicator is always off.

12.4.1

Changing the operating mode of the device status indicator

To change the operating mode of the device status indicator, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Status LED

→

Mode

→

Choose the operating mode of the device status indicator.

→

Save.
The operating mode of the device status indicator is changed.

12.4.2

Switching off the device status indicator

To switch off the device status indicator, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Status LED

→

Mode

→

LED off.

→

Save.
The device status indicator is always off.

111

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Parameter

12.5

Setting the basic parameters for identifying thedevice on büS

The Displayed name, the Location and the Description allow you to clearly identify the device on büS.

12.5.1Entering a name for the device

The entered name will be shown on any display (e.g. the Communicator software) connected to büS.
To enter the name of the device that will be shown on any display connected to büS, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

büS

→

Displayed name→Enter the name by selecting and confirming each character.

→→

OK
Save the name.
The name is set.

12.5.2Entering the location of the device

The entered location will be shown on any display (e.g. the Communicator software) connected to büS.
To enter the information where the device is geographically located, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

büS

→

Location→→→Enter the location by selecting and confirming each character.
OK
Save the location.
The location is set.

112

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Parameter

12.5.3Entering a description for the device

The description allows you to precisely identify this device. To enter a description for the device, do thefollowing:.

→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

büS

→

Description→

Enter the description (max. 19 characters) by selecting and confirming each character.

→→

OK
Save the description.
The description is set.

12.6

Setting the advanced parameters for identifying thedevice connected to büS or to a CANopen bus

12.6.1Entering a unique name for the device• Only change the Unique device name of a device if 2 devices with the same name are connectedto büS or to a CANopen bus.
• If the Unique device name of the device is changed, the participants on büS or to a CANopen bus
lose the link to the device. The link between the participants must then be restored.
The Unique device name of the device is used by the participants connected to büS or to a CANopen bus.
To change the Unique device name, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

büS

→

Advanced→

Unique device name→Enter the name by selecting and confirming each character.
113

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Parameter→→

OK
Save the name.
The unique name is set.

12.6.2

Changing the transmission speed on the device

The transmission speed for the communication on the fieldbus (both büS or CANopen) must be the samefor all the participants of the fieldbus.
By default, the transmission speed of the device is 500 kbit/s. This transmission speed is suited for a
maximum cable length of 50 m.
If the cable length is higher, reduce the transmission speed of all the participants.
To change the transmission speed of the device, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

büS

→

Advanced→

Baudrate→

Choose the transmission speed.

→

Save.

The transmission speed of the device is changed. To take the transmission speed into account, restartthe device.

12.6.3

Activating the device internal termination resistor

If the device is connected to a CANopen fieldbus or to büS, a 120 Ω termination resistor must be installedat each end of the CANopen fieldbus or of büS.
To avoid installing a physical termination resistor, the device has an internal 120 Ω termination resistor thatcan be activated if the device is installed at one end of the büS network or at one end of the CANopen
network; default factory setting defines internal termination resistor as not activated.
The internal termination resistor is no more available after 12/2022. Nevertheless it could happen
that the termination resistor activation menu is still visible on the display.
• If you activate the device internal termination resistor, do not install a termination resistor at thesame end of büS or of the CANopen fieldbus.
• Max. two 120 Ω termination resistors can equip büS or a CANopen fieldbus.
To activate the device internal termination resistor, do the following:
114→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Parameter→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

büS

→

Advanced→

Termination resistor

→

On

→

Save.
The internal termination resistor is activated.

12.6.4

Deactivating the device internal termination resistor

The internal termination resistor is no more available after 12/2022. Nevertheless it could happen
that the termination resistor activation menu is still visible on the display.
If the device is not installed at the end of büS or of a CANopen fieldbus, deactivate the device internal termination resistor.
Max. two 120 Ω termination resistors can equip büS or a CANopen fieldbus.
To deactivate the device internal termination resistor, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

büS

→

Termination resistor

→

Save.

AdvancedOff

The internal 120 Ω termination resistor is deactivated.

12.6.5

Changing the address of the device connected to a CANopenbus

The address of the device is used by büS or the CANopen fieldbus the device can be connected to.
• If the device is connected to büS, büS automatically addresses the device. By default, the address of thedevice on büS is 30.
• If the device is connected to a CANopen fieldbus, the addresses are not set automatically.

→ Make sure that each participant, including the device, connected to the CANopen fieldbus has a specifc
address.

115

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Parameter

If the device is connected to a CANopen fieldbus and another participant connected to the fieldbus has thesame address, do the following to change the address of the device:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

büS

→

büS address→→

Advanced

Change the address of the device. Make sure you enter an address that is not already used on
the same CANopen fieldbus.
Save.
The address of the device is changed.

→ Start the device to take the new address into account. See chapter 14.3.1 Restarting the device.
12.6.6

Setting the digital communication for büS or for a CANopenbus

By default, the operating mode of the digital communication is set to Standalone and the measured
process data (PDOs, process data objects) is not sent on a connected fieldbus.
The other operating modes of the digital communication are büS or CANopen.
If the device is connected to büS or to a CANopen bus, do the following to change the operating mode ofthe digital communication:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

büS

→

Advanced→

Bus mode→büS or CANopen.

→

Save.

→ Restart the device.
The operating mode of the digital communication is büS or CANopen.
If the operating mode of the digital communication is büS, the CANopen status is set to Operational(see chapter 13.3.6) and the PDOs are sent to büS.
116

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Parameter

If the operating mode of the digital communication is CANopen, the CANopen status is set to Pre-op(see chapter 13.3.6) until the CANopen network master switches the device to Operational.

→ To stop the PDOs being sent to büS or to a fieldbus, see chapter 12.6.7.
12.6.7

Stop sending the measured process data (PDOs) to büS or to
the CANopen fieldbus

If the device is connected to büS or to a CANopen fieldbus and the Bus mode is set to büS or to CANopen
and you want to temporarily stop sending the PDOs to büS or to the CANopen fieldbus, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

büS

→

Bus mode→Standalone

→

Save.

Advanced→ Restart the device.
The CANopen status is set to Pre-op and the PDOs are not sent to büS or to a CANopen fieldbus.
The communication with the software Bürkert Communicator is still operational.

→ To enable the transmission of the PDOs to büS or to a fieldbus, see chapter 12.6.6.

12.7

Monitoring the device supply voltage or the device
temperature

The supply voltage of the device and the internal temperature of the device are monitored.
A monitored value can be:• in the normal operating range,• in the warning range,• in the error range.
4 limit values are set, 2 error limits and 2 warning limits. The error limits can only be read but the warning
limits can be adjusted.
Fig. 49 explains how the device reacts when the monitored value enters into another range (for example,
from the normal range into the warning range). The reaction time depends on the hysteresis value and onwhether the monitored value increases or decreases.

117

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Parameter

h

h

h

h: value of the hysteresis. A hysteresis value that is equal to 0means that the device reacts assoon as a limit is reached.

h

1
2a

2b

3a

3b

A: low error limit (Error low)A

B

increasing 3amonitored
value

C

2a

3a

2a

A

B

D: high error limit (Error high)
3b

2b

1
C

decreasing
monitoredvalue

D

D: Error high

A: Error low
B: Warning low

C: high warning limit (Warning high)

3b

2b

1

B: low warning limit (Warning low)D

C: Warning high1: normal range of the monitoredvalue
2a: lower warning range of themonitored value
3a: lower error range of the monitored value
2b: upper warning range of themonitored value
3b: upper error range of the monitored value

Monitored
value is in the

Colour of the device status indicatorand generated message

Normal range

Green indicator, no message

Error range

Red indicator, error message

Warning range Yellow indicator, warning message

Condition• if the monitored value was in the LOWER
warning range and the LOW WARNING value +the HYSTERESIS value is reached.
• if the monitored value was in the UPPERWARNING range and the HIGH WARNING
value minus the HYSTERESIS value is reached.
• if the monitored value was in the LOWER
warning range and the LOW ERROR value isreached.
• if the monitored value was in the UPPER
warning range and the HIGH ERROR value isreached.
• if the monitored value was in the LOWER error
range and the LOW ERROR value + the HYSTERESIS value is reached.
• if the monitored value was in the normal range
and the HIGH WARNING value is reached.
• if the monitored value was in the UPPER error
range and the HIGH ERROR value minus the
HYSTERESIS value is reached.
• if the monitored value was in the normal range
and the LOW WARNING value is reached.

118

Fig. 49:

Operating principle of monitoring with a hysteresis

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Parameter

12.7.1

Reading out the 2 error limit values

To read out the limits the supply voltage of the device should be in, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Alarm limits→

Supply voltage or Device temperature→

Error high or Error low→

Go back to the parent menu.

12.7.2

Changing the 2 warning limit values

To change the warning limits of the supply voltage or of the device temperature, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Alarm limits→

Supply voltage or Device temperature→

Warning high or Warning low→

Set the warning limit.

→

Save.
The warning limits are changed.

12.7.3

Reading out the hysteresis value

To read out the hysteresis value, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Alarm limits→

Supply voltage or Device temperature119

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Parameter→

Hysteresis→

Go back to the parent menu.

12.8

Reading out the low warning limit for the voltage ofthe internal battery

The device has a small battery to store energy so that the time system can run for 7 days when the device is
not powered.
To read out the value of the low warning limit, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Alarm limits→

Warning battery voltage low→

Go back to the parent menu.

12.9

Start-up – Doing the basic settings

The Quick start settings are the same as those made when the device is energized for the first time.
To change the Quick start settings, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Quick start→

Display→

Choose the display language
chosen language.

→

Choose the time zone→

Choose whether daylight saving (summer time) is automatically taken into account (On) or not (Off)for the display of the time.

120

The current date and time settings are displayed in the→

Set the year→

Set the month→

Set the day

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Parameter→

Set the hours→

Set the minutes

The new date and time settings are displayed.

→

Choose the unit system for all the measurements→

Save the Quick start settings or

12.10

Confirm.

go back to the parent menu without saving the new settings.

Activating the diagnostics function

WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-conforming adjustment.
Non-conforming adjustment could lead to injuries and damage the device and its surroundings.
▶ The operators in charge of adjustment must have read and understood the contents of the Operating
Instructions.
▶ In particular, observe the safety recommendations and intended use.
▶ The device/installation must only be adjusted by suitably trained staff.
By default, all the diagnostics events related to the process, the electronics or the sensor, the messages
related to the monitoring of the process values (e.g. the flow rate) and the messages related to problems on
the device and on büS are disabled.
To activate the diagnostics, do the following:→ Activate the needed diagnostics events. See chapter 15.13.
→ Activate the monitoring of the process values that must be monitored. See chapter 15.4.5,
chapter 15.6.5, chapter 15.7.5, chapter 15.9.3, chapter 15.11.6, chapter 15.12.7.

→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Diagnostics→

Active→Save and restart the device.

Read the displayed message

The needed diagnostics are active.

121

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Parameter

12.11

Disabling all the diagnostics

By default, all the diagnostics events related to the process, the electronics or the sensor, the messages
related to the monitoring of the process values (e.g. the flow rate) and the messages related to problems on
the device and on büS are disabled.
If the diagnostics are active on the device, do the following to disable them:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Diagnostics→

Inactive→

Save and restart the device.

Read the displayed message

All the diagnostics are disabled.

12.12

Configuration provider

If active on the device, the configuration provider manages the configuration data of the device modules(for example, display module, Ethernet module,...). The configuration provider does not manage the configuration data of the transmitter board. The transmitter board directly saves its configuration data on theconfiguration memory.

→ Make sure the configuration provider is active on the device. Refer to chapter 12.12.1.
→ Make sure a configuration memory (SIM card) is inserted in its slot on the device. Refer to Fig. 50 or to
the parameter Transferable memory status described in chapter 13.2.9 Reading out the status of theconfiguration memory.

→ Make sure you use a configuration memory from Bürkert. Configuration memories can be bought fromyour Bürkert branch office.

Upon the device startup, the device can have one of the following behaviours:• If the configuration memory is empty or contains data from a device with a previous software version, theconfiguration memory is formatted and the current configuration data is saved on it.
• If the configuration memory contains data which is compatible with the configuration provider, the serial
numbers of the modules with the same article number are compared:− If the serial numbers are different, the configuration provider copies the configuration data from theconfiguration memory to the device modules.
− If the serial numbers are the same, the configuration data are not copied.
− If the device is equipped with an additional module, its configuration data is saved on the configuration
memory.
• The configuration provider automatically saves the configuration data of a module as soon as a module
setting has been changed.

122

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Parameter• On request, the configuration provider replaces the configuration data on the memory card with thecurrent configuration data of the equipped modules. See chapter 12.12.2. For example, this is useful toremove from the configuration memory, the configuration data of a removed module.
• On request, the configuration provider transfers the configuration data of all the modules from the configuration memory to the device. The modules with the same article numbers must have the same serial
numbers. Refer to chapter 12.12.3.

Configuration
memoryFig. 50:

Location of the configuration memory (SIM card)

12.12.1

Reading out the status of the configuration provider

Do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Configuration provider→

Status

→Go back to the parent menu.

123

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Parameter

12.12.2 Replacing the data of the configuration memory
If you want to replace the configuration data which is stored on the configuration memory by the current
configuration data of all the device modules, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Configuration provider→

Erase all client configurations

→

On

→

Save.

→ Restart the device.
The currrent configuration data of all the device modules has been stored on the configuration memory.
The previous configuration data has been removed from the configuration memory.
The parameter Erase all client configurations is automatically set to Off.

12.12.3 Transferring the configuration data of all the modules
On request, the configuration provider transfers the configuration data of all the modules from the configuration memory to the device. The modules with the same article numbers must have the same serial
numbers.
Do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Configuration provider→

Force reconfiguration of all clients

→

On

→

Save.

→ Restart the device.
The configuration data of all the device modules has been transferred from the configuration memory to
the device.
The parameter Force reconfiguration of all clients is automatically set to Off.

124

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Parameter

12.13

Changing the date and the time

The date and time are set in the Quick start settings when the device is energized for the first time.
To change the date and time, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Date and time→

Choose the time zone→

Choose whether the summer time is automatically set (On) or not (Off) for the display of the time.
Confirm.

→

Set the year→

Set the month→

Set the day→

Set the hours→

Set the minutes

The New settings are displayed

Save.

The date and time are set.

12.14

Changing the display language

By default, the display language is English.
The display language is set in the Quick start settings, when the device is energized for the first time.
To change the display language, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Language→

Choose the language.

→

Save.
The display language is changed.
125

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Parameter

12.15

Activating the adjustment protection throughpasswords

By default, the device adjustment is not protected by passwords.
The default user level is the Installer level.
To activate the adjustment protection through passwords, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Passwords→

Password protection→

Choose On→

Save
The protection through passwords is enabled.

12.16

Changing the protection passwords of the Advanceduser and Installer user levels

If the protection through passwords is active, you can change the passwords of the Advanced user andInstaller user levels.
The lowest user level is not protected through a password.
To change the passwords of the Advanced user and Installer user levels, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Passwords→

Change passwords→

Advanced user or Installer→

Set the new password.

→

Save
The password is changed.

→ If you have forgotten your passwords, you can restore the default passwords with the Type 8920 Com126

municator software.

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Parameter

12.17

Deactivating the adjustment protection throughpasswords

By default, the device adjustment is not protected by passwords.
The default user level is the Installer level.
If the adjustment protection through passwords has been activated, do the following to deactivate it:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Passwords→

Password protection→

Choose Off→

Save
The protection through passwords is disabled.

12.18

Changing the units of the physical quantities

The physical quantities, used by the device, are displayed on the device with the following default units (inthe metric unit system):• current: mA (milliamperes)• density: g/cm3 (grams per cubic centimetre)• flow rate: l/min (liters per minute)• frequency: Hz (Hertz)• length: mm (millimeters)• mass: g (grams)• mass flow rate: kg/h (kilograms per hour)• velocity: m/s (meters per second)• temperature: °C (degrees Celsius)• temperature difference: °C (degrees Celsius)• time: s (seconds)• voltage: V (Volts)• volume: l (liters)
To change the units of a physical quantity, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view

127

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Parameter→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Physical units→

Choose the physical quantity→

Choose the units

Save

The units are changed.

12.19

Displaying the text -- (NaN) or a numerical value

If the device cannot measure a process value, then the display module will display either the text -- or anumerical value. The Bürkert Communicator software will display NaN instead of --.
Whether to display the text -- (NaN) or the numerical value, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

NaN Replacement→

NaN Process values. A list of process values is displayed.

• To display the text -- or NaN, do the following:→→

Deselect all the process values.
Save.

If the device cannot measure a selected process value, then the display module shows --. The Bürkert
Communicator software displays NaN instead of --.
• To display a numerical value, do the following:

→
→
→
→
128

Select the related process values

Save.

NaN Replacement value

values.

Set the numerical value. The numerical value is applied to all the selected process

Save.

If the device cannot measure a selected process value, then the display module and the Bürkert Communicator software display the numerical value.

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Diagnostics

13

GENERAL SETTINGS – DIAGNOSTICS

13.1

User levels of the menu items

Menu item of the General settings – Diagnostics menu
Device status
büS status – Receive errors
büS status – Receive errors max.
büS status – Transmit errors
büS status – Transmit errors max.
büS status – Reset error counter
Configuration provider – Status
Configuration provider – Number of loaded client configurations
Configuration provider – Number of reconfigured clients
Configuration provider – Number of managed devices
Configuration provider – Number of missing devices
Configuration provider – Number of failed configuration loads
Configuration provider – Number of failed reconfigurations
Configuration provider – Managed devices

Minimum user level
Basic user
Advanced user
Advanced user
Advanced user
Advanced user
Installer
Basic user
Basic user
Basic user
Basic user
Basic user
Basic user
Basic user
Installer(Bürkert Communicator only)

13.2

Reading out data related to the device

13.2.1

Reading out the number of operating hours of the device

To read out the number of hours the device has already been operating, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→Device status→

Operating duration→

Go back to the parent menu.

The number of operating hours of the device is displayed.

129

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Diagnostics

13.2.2

Reading out the current value of the internal temperature of
the device

To read out the current value of the internal temperature of the device, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→Device status→

Go back to the parent menu.

13.2.3

Device temperature

Reading out the minimum or the maximum value of theinternal temperature of the device

To read out the minimum or the maximum value of the internal temperature of the device since the firstpower-up of the device, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→Device status→

Min./Max. values→→

Max. temperature or Min. temperature
the internal temperature of the device is displayed.

The minimum or the maximum value of

Go back to the parent menu.

13.2.4

Reading out the current value of the supply voltage

To read out the current value of the supply voltage, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
130→

Device status

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Diagnostics→

Supply voltage→

Go back to the parent menu.

13.2.5The value of the supply voltage is displayed.

Reading out the minimum or the maximum value of the supply
voltage

To read out the minimum or the maximum value of the supply voltage since the last power-up of the device,
do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→Device status→

Min./Max. values→→

Max. supply voltage or Min. supply voltageof the supply voltage is displayed.

The minimum or the maximum value

Go back to the parent menu.

13.2.6

Reading out the current value of the current consumption of
the device

To read out the value of the current consumption of the device, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→→→Device status
Current consumption
displayed.

The value of the current consumption of the device is

Go back to the parent menu.

131

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Diagnostics

13.2.7

Reading out the minimum or the maximum value of the current
consumption of the device

To read out the minimum or the maximum value of the current consumption of the device since the firstpower-up of the device, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→Device status→

Min./Max. values→→

Max. current consumption or Min. current consumption
maximum value of the current consumption of the device is displayed.

The minimum or the

Go back to the parent menu.

13.2.8

Reading out the number of device starts

To read out the number of restarts of the device, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→Device status→

Device boot counter→

Go back to the parent menu.

13.2.9Reading out the status of the configuration memory

To read out the status of the configuration memory, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
132

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Diagnostics→

Device status→

Transferable memory status→

Go back to the parent menu.

13.2.10 Checking whether the date and time are correct
To check whether the date and time are still correct on the device, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→Device status→

Current system time→

Go back to the parent menu.

13.2.11Checking the voltage of the internal battery

The device has a small battery to store energy so that the time system can run for 7 days when the device is
not powered.
To check the voltage of the internal battery, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→Device status→

Battery voltage→

Go back to the parent menu.

133

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Diagnostics

13.3

Reading out data related to büS

13.3.1

Reading out the number of current receive errors

To read out the number of current receive errors, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→büS status→

Receive errors→

Go back to the parent menu.

13.3.2

Reading out the maximum number of receive errors since thelast power-up of the device

To read out the maximum number of receive errors, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→büS status→

Receive errors max.

→

Go back to the parent menu.

13.3.3

Reading out the number of current transmit errors

To read out the number of current transmit errors, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→büS status

134

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Diagnostics→

Transmit errors→

Go back to the parent menu.

13.3.4

Reading out the maximum number of transmit errors since thelast power-up of the device

To read out the maximum number of transmit errors, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→büS status→

Go back to the parent menu.

13.3.5

Transmit errors max.

Resetting the 2 maximum error counters

To reset the 2 maximum error counters, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→büS status→

Reset error counter→

Confirm.
The 2 maximum error counters are reset.

13.3.6

Reading out whether the measured process data (PDO,
process data object) is sent on büS or on the CANopen
fieldbus

To read out whether the measured process data (PDO, process data object) is sent on büS or on the
CANopen fieldbus, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

135

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Diagnostics→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→büS status→

CANopen status.

• If the CANopen status is Operational, the PDOs are sent to büS.
• If the CANopen status is Pre-Op (pre-operational), the PDOs are not sent on büS or on the CANopen
fieldbus and a message is generated in the message list. For example, the Pre-Op status is active if the
Bus mode is set to Standalone (see chapter 12.6.7).

→

Go back to the parent menu.

13.4

Configuration provider information

13.4.1

Reading out the current status of the configuration provider

Do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→

Configuration provider→

Status

→Go back to the parent menu.

Table 23:

Possible statuses of the configuration provider

Inactive

Meaning
The configuration provider is starting.
The configuration provider operates normally and is waiting for changes of a client(module).
The configuration provider is initializing.
The configuration provider has initialized successfully and is waiting for clients(modules).
The configuration provider is checking if the clients (modules) are available, aremissing or have been replaced.
The configuration provider asks the clients (modules) to sign up again. Happens
when a new client has signed up.
The configuration provider is not active on the device.

Disabled

The configuration provider is disabled because an error has occurred.

StatusProvider start
Wait for changes
Initialization
Wait for clients
Verify clients
Retrigger clients

136

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Diagnostics

13.4.2

Reading out the number of loaded client (module)
configurations

The value is valid since the last device start-up.
Do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→

Configuration provider→

Number of loaded client configurations→

Go back to the parent menu.

13.4.3

Reading out the number of reconfigured clients (modules)

The value is valid since the last device start-up.
Do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→

Configuration provider→

Number of reconfigured clients→

Go back to the parent menu.

13.4.4

Reading out the number of managed modules

The value is valid since the last device start-up.
Do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
137

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Diagnostics→

Configuration provider→

Number of managed devices→

Go back to the parent menu.

13.4.5

Reading out the number of missing modules

The value is valid since the last device start-up.
Do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→

Configuration provider→

Number of missing devices→

Go back to the parent menu.

13.4.6

Reading out the number of failed configuration loads

The value is valid since the last device start-up.
Do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→

Configuration provider→

Number of failed configuration loads→

Go back to the parent menu.

138

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Diagnostics

13.4.7

Reading out the number of failed reconfigurations

The value is valid since the last device start-up.
Do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→

Configuration provider→

Number of failed reconfigurations→

Go back to the parent menu.

13.4.8Erasing the configuration data of a single moduleThis function is only available on the PC software Bürkert Communicator.
If you want to replace the configuration data stored on the configuration memory by the current configuration data of each module, do the following:
Do the following:→ General settings

DIAGNOSTICS

Configuration provider

Managed devices→ Click Next to go through the modules which are managed by the configuration provider.
→ When the module whose data must be erased is displayed, check the box Erase configuration of client.
→ To erase the configuration data of the selected modules, click Finish.
The current configuration data of the selected modules is stored on the configuration memory.

139

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Maintenance

14

GENERAL SETTINGS – MAINTENANCE

14.1

User levels of the menu items

Menu item of the General settings – Maintenance menu
Device information
Reset device

Minimum user level
Basic user
Installer

14.2

Reading out some device information

14.2.1

Reading out the displayed name of the device

To read out the displayed name of the device, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→Device information→

Displayed name→

Go back to the parent menu.

14.2.2

Reading out the article number of the device

To read out the article number of the device, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→Device information→

Ident. number→

Go back to the parent menu.

140

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Maintenance14.2.3

Reading out the serial number of the device

To read out the serial number of the device, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→Device information→

Serial number→

Go back to the parent menu.

14.2.4

Reading out the article number of the device software

To read out the article number of the device software, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→Device information→

Software ident. number→

Go back to the parent menu.

14.2.5

Reading out the version number of the device software

To read out the version number of the device software, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→Device information→

Software version→

Go back to the parent menu.

141

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Maintenance14.2.6

Reading out the version number of the büS software

To read out the version number of the büS software, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→Device information→

büS version→

Go back to the parent menu.

14.2.7

Reading out the version number of the device hardware

To read out the version number of the device hardware, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→Device information→

Hardware version→

Go back to the parent menu.

14.2.8

Reading out the Type number of the device

To read out the Type number of the device, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→Device information→

Product type code→

Go back to the parent menu.

142

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Maintenance14.2.9Reading out the manufacturing date of the device

To read out the manufacturing date of the device, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→Device information→

Manufacture date→

Go back to the parent menu.

14.2.10 Reading out the version of the embedded eds file
To read out the version of the embedded eds file, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→Device information→

eds version→

Go back to the parent menu.

The content of the eds file is described in the related supplement available at country.burkert.com.

143

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Maintenance

14.3

Resetting the device

WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-conforming adjustment.
Non-conforming adjustment could lead to injuries and damage the device and its surroundings.
▶ The operators in charge of adjustment must have read and understood the contents of the Operating
Instructions.
▶ In particular, observe the safety recommendations and intended use.
▶ The device/installation must only be adjusted by suitably trained staff.

14.3.1

Restarting the device

To restart the device, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Reset device→

RestartThe device restarts.

14.3.2

Resetting the device to all its factory settings

To reset the device to all its factory settings, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Reset device→

Reset to factory settings
The device is reset to all its factory settings.

→

Acknowledge the displayed message.

144

englishto reset the device to all its factory settings.

Type 8098 FLOWave L
General settings – Maintenance14.3.3Updating the menu configuration of the device

If the hardware configuration of the device has changed, update the configuration of the menu structure:• To have access to the menu entries related to the new components.
• To remove the menu entries related to the removed components.
• To avoid that error messages are generated.
For example, if you disconnect the display module because it is not used and you replace it with a blind
cover. In that case, updating of the device menu configuration must be done with the Bürkert Communicator software.
To update the menu configuration of the device, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

General settings→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Scan device for extensions
If you confirm updating of the menu configuration, the device will restart several times.

→

to update the menu configuration of the device. The device is restarted several times.
The menu configuration of the device is up-to-date.

145

englishType 8098 FLOWave L﻿146

englishType 8098 FLOWave L﻿Menu SAW sensor – PARAMETER
15

SAW SENSOR – PARAMETER............................................................................................................152
15.1 Safety instructions....................................................................................................................152
15.2 User levels of the editable menu items....................................................................................152
15.3 Default settings.........................................................................................................................152
15.4 Setting the parameters of the volume flow rate......................................................................153
15.4.1

Giving a user defined name to the measured volume flow rate.............................153

15.4.2

Activating the damping of the volume flow rate values and choosing apredefined damping level.........................................................................................153

15.4.3

Activating a user-defined damping of the volume flow rate values.......................155

15.4.4

Deactivating the damping of the volume flow rate values......................................156

15.4.5

Activating the monitoring of the volume flow rate..................................................156

15.4.6

Deactivating the monitoring of the volume flow rate..............................................158

15.4.7

Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of thevolume flow rate.......................................................................................................159

15.4.8Resetting the default values of the error limits, the warning limits and thehysteresis of the volume flow rate...........................................................................160

15.4.9Enabling the cut-off function of the volume flow rate.............................................161

15.4.10

Changing the cut-off value of the volume flow rate................................................162

15.4.11Disabling the cut-off function of the volume flow rate............................................162

15.4.12

Resetting the default values of all the volume flow rate parameters.....................163

15.5 Setting the parameters of the mass flow rate (optional feature)............................................164
15.5.1

Giving a user defined name to the measured mass flow rate................................164

15.5.2

Activating the damping of the mass flow rate values and choosing a predefined damping level..............................................................................................164

15.5.3

Activating a user-defined damping of the mass flow rate values..........................166

15.5.4

Deactivating the damping of the mass flow rate values.........................................167

15.5.5

Activating the monitoring of the mass flow rate.....................................................167

15.5.6

Deactivating the monitoring of the mass flow rate.................................................169

15.5.7

Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of themass flow rate...........................................................................................................170

15.5.8Resetting the default values of the error limits, the warning limits and thehysteresis of the mass flow rate..............................................................................170

15.5.9Enabling the cut-off function of the mass flow rate................................................171

15.5.10

Changing the cut-off value of the mass flow rate...................................................172
147

englishType 8098 FLOWave L﻿

15.5.11Disabling the cut-off function of the mass flow rate...............................................173

15.5.12

Resetting the default values of all the mass flow rate parameters........................173

15.6 Setting the parameters of the liquid temperature...................................................................174
15.6.1

Giving a user defined name to the measured liquid temperature..........................174

15.6.2

Activating the damping of the liquid temperature values and choosing apredefined damping level.........................................................................................174

15.6.3

Activating a user-defined damping of the liquid temperature values....................176

15.6.4

Deactivating the damping of the liquid temperature values...................................177

15.6.5

Activating the monitoring of the liquid temperature...............................................177

15.6.6

Deactivating the monitoring of the liquid temperature...........................................178

15.6.7

Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of theliquid temperature.....................................................................................................179

15.6.8Resetting the default values of the error limits, the warning limits and thehysteresis of the liquid temperature...................................................................................179

15.6.9Resetting the default values of all the liquid temperature parameters..................180

15.7 Setting the parameters of the liquid velocity...........................................................................181
15.7.1

Giving a user defined name to the measured liquid velocity..................................181

15.7.2

Activating the damping of the liquid velocity values and choosing a predefined damping level..............................................................................................181

15.7.3

Activating a user-defined damping of the liquid velocity values............................183

15.7.4

Deactivating the damping of the liquid velocity values..........................................184

15.7.5

Activating the monitoring of the liquid velocity.......................................................184

15.7.6

Deactivating the monitoring of the liquid velocity...................................................185

15.7.7

Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of theliquid velocity............................................................................................................186

15.7.8Resetting the default values of the error limits, the warning limits and thehysteresis of the liquid velocity................................................................................186

15.7.9Resetting the default values of all the liquid velocity parameters..........................187

15.8 Setting the parameters of the liquid density (optional feature)...............................................188
15.8.1

Giving a user defined name to the measured liquid density..................................188

15.8.2

Activating the damping of the liquid density values and choosing a predefined damping level..............................................................................................188

15.8.3

Activating a user-defined damping of the liquid density values............................190

15.8.4

Deactivating the damping of the liquid density values...........................................191

15.8.5

Activating the monitoring of the liquid density.......................................................191

15.8.6

Deactivating the monitoring of the liquid density...................................................192

15.8.7

Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of theliquid density.............................................................................................................193

148

englishType 8098 FLOWave L﻿

15.8.8Resetting the default values of the error limits, the warning limits and thehysteresis of the liquid density................................................................................193

15.8.9Setting the measurement mode of liquid density...................................................194

15.8.10

Resetting the default values of all the liquid density parameters..........................19515.9 Setting the parameters of the volume totalizers......................................................................196
15.9.1

Giving a user defined name to each volume totalizer.............................................196

15.9.2Choosing the counting direction of each volume totalizer.....................................196

15.9.3

Activating the monitoring of each volume totalizer value.......................................197

15.9.4

Deactivating the monitoring of each volume totalizer............................................198

15.9.5

Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of eachvolume totalizer........................................................................................................198

15.9.6

Resetting the default values of the error limits, the warning limits and thehysteresis of each volume totalizer.........................................................................199

15.9.7

Enabling the user to start, stop or reset each volume totalizer..............................199

15.9.8Disabling the user to start, stop or reset each volume totalizer.............................200

15.9.9Starting each volume totalizer.................................................................................200

15.9.10Stopping each volume totalizer...............................................................................200

15.9.11

Resetting each volume totalizer to a Preset value ................................................201

15.9.12

Changing the Preset value for a volume totalizer reset..........................................201

15.9.13

Resetting the overflow counter of each volume totalizer.......................................202

15.9.14

Resetting all the parameters of each volume totalizer to their default values.......202

15.10 Setting the parameters of the mass totalizers (optional feature)............................................20315.10.1

Giving a user defined name to each mass totalizer................................................20315.10.2

Choosing the counting direction of each mass totalizer........................................20315.10.3

Activating the monitoring of each mass totalizer value..........................................20415.10.4

Deactivating the monitoring of each mass totalizer...............................................205

15.10.5

Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of eachmass totalizer............................................................................................................205

15.10.6

Resetting the default values of the error limits, the warning limits and thehysteresis of each mass totalizer.............................................................................206

15.10.7

Enabling the user to start, stop or reset each mass totalizer.................................207

15.10.8

Disabling the user to start, stop or reset each mass totalizer................................207

15.10.9

Starting each mass totalizer.....................................................................................20815.10.10 Stopping each mass totalizer...................................................................................20815.10.11 Resetting each mass totalizer to a Preset value ....................................................209
15.10.12 Changing the Preset value for a mass totalizer reset.............................................209
15.10.13 Resetting the overflow counter of each mass totalizer..........................................210
15.10.14 Resetting all the parameters of each mass totalizer to their default values..........210

english149

Type 8098 FLOWave L﻿

15.11 Setting the parameters of the differentiation factor (optional feature)...................................211
15.11.1

What is the differentiation factor?............................................................................211

15.11.2

Giving a user defined name to the measured differentiation factor.......................211

15.11.3

Activating the damping of the differentiation factor values and choosing
a predefined damping level .....................................................................................212

15.11.4

Activating a user-defined damping of the differentiation factor values ................213

15.11.5

Deactivating the damping of the differentiation factor values ..............................214

15.11.6

Activating the monitoring of the differentiation factor............................................215

15.11.7

Deactivating the monitoring of the differentiation factor........................................215

15.11.8

Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the differentiation factor.....................................................................................................216

15.11.9

Resetting the default values of the error limits, the warning limits and thehysteresis of the differentiation factor.....................................................................217

15.11.10 Setting the temperature compensation to measure the differentiation factor.......218
15.11.11 Setting the temperature compensation for a liquid other than water....................218
15.11.12 Activating the temperature compensation for water..............................................219
15.11.13 Resetting the default values of all the differentiation factor parameters...............220
15.11.14 Use case example of the differentiation factor.......................................................22015.12 Setting the parameters of the acoustic transmission factor (optional feature)......................221
15.12.1

What is the acoustic transmission factor?..............................................................221

15.12.2

Giving a user defined name to the measured acoustic transmission factor.........221

15.12.3

Activating the damping of the values of the acoustic transmission factor
and choosing a predefined damping level .............................................................222

15.12.4

Activating a user-defined damping of the values of the acoustic transmission factor ..........................................................................................................224

15.12.5

Deactivating the damping of the values of the acoustic transmission .................225

15.12.6

Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of theacoustic transmission factor....................................................................................225

15.12.7

Activating the monitoring of the acoustic transmission factor...............................226

15.12.8

Deactivating the monitoring of the acoustic transmission factor..........................227

15.12.9

Resetting the default values of the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the acoustic transmission factor.......................................................................... 227

15.12.10 Resetting the default values of all the acoustic transmission factor parameters.. 228

150

englishType 8098 FLOWave L﻿

15.13 Diagnostics: monitoring special events that occur in the process, on the sensor or on
the electronics...........................................................................................................................228
15.13.1

Enabling the diagnostics for special events in the process...................................232

15.13.2

Disabling the diagnostics on a special event related to the process....................233

15.13.3

Disabling the diagnostics on a special event occurring on the electronics..........233

15.13.4

Enabling the diagnostics for special events occurring on the electronics............234

15.13.5

Disabling the diagnostics on a special event occurring on the sensor.................234

15.13.6

Enabling the diagnostics for special events occurring on the sensor...................235

15.14 Getting as accurate measurements of the volume flow rate, the mass flow rate or theliquid velocity as possible........................................................................................................236
15.14.1

Activating the viscosity compensation for water-like liquids.................................237

15.14.2

Activating the compensation for a liquid with a constant viscosity.......................237

15.14.3

Activating the compensation for a liquid with a linear viscosity compensation curve..............................................................................................................238

15.14.4

Activating the compensation for a liquid with a quadratic viscosity compensation curve........................................................................................................239

15.14.5

Activating the compensation for a liquid with an inverse quadratic viscosity compensation curve......................................................................................240

15.14.6

Resetting the default values of the viscosity compensation parameters..............241

15.15 Setting the refresh time............................................................................................................242
15.15.1

Use case of the refresh time....................................................................................242

15.15.2

Changing the refresh time........................................................................................242

151

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15

SAW SENSOR – PARAMETER

15.1

Safety instructions

WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-conforming adjustment.
Non-conforming adjustment could lead to injuries and damage the device and its surroundings.
▶ The operators in charge of adjustment must have read and understood the contents of the Operating
Instructions.
▶ In particular, observe the safety recommendations and intended use.
▶ The device/installation must only be adjusted by suitably trained staff.

15.2

User levels of the editable menu items

Menu item of the SAW sensor – Parameter menu
Stand. meas. values (standard measurement values)
Add. meas. values (additional measurement values)
Diag. events (diagnostics events)
Refresh time

15.3

Minimum user level
Advanced user
Installer

Default settings

You can find the default settings of the device in the CANopen supplement for the Type 8098 FLOWave L atcountry.burkert.com.

→ Before making any changes to the settings, use the Bürkert Communicator software to print a pdf filewith all the default settings of the device.

152

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.4

Setting the parameters of the volume flow rate

15.4.1

Giving a user defined name to the measured volume flow rate

The name is used to identify the process value in the user defined views and in all the menus where theprocess value is displayed (for example in the Outputs menu).
By default, the name associated to the measured volume flow rate is Volume flow.
To add a user defined name to the default name, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Volume flow→

Value name→characters.

→→.

Enter the name by selecting and confirming each character. The name can have up to 19

OK
Save the name.
The name is changed.

15.4.2

Activating the damping of the volume flow rate values andchoosing a predefined damping level

The damping makes it possible to damp the fluctuations of the measured values of the volume flow rate:• on the display,• on the totalizers,• on the outputs. The damping set for an analog output comes in addition to the damping of the volume
flow.
The damping is not applied to the new measured value, if the 2 following conditions are met:
• a Low, Medium or High damping level is active,• and the variation between 2 values that are measured one after the other is higher than 30 % (for example
when charging the pipe or stopping the flow).
By default, the measured volume flow rate values are damped with the level Medium.
The Low damping level or no damping at all (None) are suited for applications/processes that need fast
response times.
The Medium damping level or the High damping level are suited if the volume flow rate values change
slowly.

english153

Type 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter→ As an alternative to the 3 predefined damping levels Low, Medium or High, you can set your own
damping parameters. See chapter 15.4.3.

Chosen damping level is applied

Damping None: all
the fluctuations of themeasured values aretransmitted

Damping Low

Damping Medium

Damping HighNo damping if 2 consecutive measured values vary for ±30 %Fig. 51:

Operation of the available damping levels

Table 24:

Response times (10 %...90 %) of the damping levels for the volume flow rate measurements

Damping level
None

Response time
• 5 s if the Refresh time is set to Long
• < 0.5 s if the Refresh time is set to Short or Very short.
1s
10 s
30 s
User-defined Response time: see chapter 15.4.3

Low
MediumHigh
Special

To set a predefined damping level of the measured volume flow rate values, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Volume flow→

Damping→→

The Current settings are displayed

Choose a damping level between Low, Medium and Highdisplayed.

The New settings areSave.
The damping of the volume flow rate values is active and a predefined damping level is chosen.

154

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.4.3

Activating a user-defined damping of the volume flow rate
valuesThe damping makes it possible to damp the fluctuations of the measured values of the volume flow rate:• on the display,• on the totalizers,• on the outputs. The damping set for an analog output comes in addition to the damping of the volume
flow.
By default, the measured volume flow rate values are damped with the level Medium.
To damp the fluctuations of the measured values, you can:→ either choose 1 of the 3 predefined damping levels: Low, Medium or High. See chapter 15.4.2.
→ Or you can set your own damping parameters with the Special damping.
With the Special damping, you can set 2 parameters:• a user-defined Response time in seconds,• the Jump threshold, i.e. a user-defined percentage. If 2 consecutive measured values vary for ± the percentage, no damping is applied to the second measured value.
To set your own damping parameters of the measured volume flow rate values, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Volume flow→

Damping→Special→Set the value of the Response time→

Choose if the Jump threshold is enabled or disabled→

If the Jump threshold is enabled, set the value.

→

The New settings are displayed

The Current settings are displayed

Save.

The special damping of the volume flow rate values is active.

155

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.4.4

Deactivating the damping of the volume flow rate values

If the damping of the volume flow rate values is active, do the following to deactivate it:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Volume flow→

Damping→

Choose None

→

Save.

.
The Current settings are displayed
The New settings are displayed.

The damping of the volume flow rate values is inactive.

15.4.5

Activating the monitoring of the volume flow rate

Because of a malfunction in the process or in the volume flow rate sensor, the measured volume flow rate
value can be too high or too low.
A monitored value can be:• in the normal operating range.
• in the warning range,• in the error range.
You can set 4 limit values: 2 error limits and 2 warning limits.

→ To set the limit values, see chapter 15.4.7 Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresisof the volume flow rate.

Fig. 52 explains how the device reacts when the monitored value enters in another range (for example, fromthe normal range into the warning range). The reaction time depends on the hysteresis value and whether
the monitored value increases or decreases.

156

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

h

h

h

h: value of the hysteresis. An hysteresis value that is equal to 0means that the device reacts assoon as a limit is reached.

h

1
2a

2b

3a

3b

A: low error limit (Error low)A

B

increasing 3amonitored
value

C

2a

3a

2a

A

B

A: Error low
B: Warning low

D: high error limit (Error high)
3b

2b

1
C

C: high warning limit (Warning high)

3b

2b

1

B: low warning limit (Warning low)Ddecreasing
monitoredvalue

1: normal range of the monitored value

D: Error high3a: lower error range of the monitored value

D

C: Warning high2a: lower warning range of themonitored value

2b: upper warning range of themonitored value
3b: upper error range of the monitored value

Monitored
value is in theError range

Colour of the device status indicatorand generated message
Red 1) indicator, Failure message

Normal range• if the monitored value was in the normal range
and the HIGH WARNING value is reached.
• if the monitored value was in the UPPER error
range and the HIGH ERROR value minus the
HYSTERESIS value is reached.

• White 1) indicator, no message, if
the Diagnostics in the menu SAW
sensor – Parameter is inactive(default setting).
• or green 1) indicator, no message, if
the Diagnostics in the menu General
settings – DIAGNOSTICS are active.

1)• if the monitored value was in the LOWER
warning range and the LOW ERROR value isreached.

• if the monitored value was in the UPPER
warning range and the HIGH ERROR value isreached.
Yellow 1) indicator, Out of specification • if the monitored value was in the LOWER error
message
range and the LOW ERROR value + the HYSTERESIS value is reached.

Warning range

Fig. 52:

Condition• if the monitored value was in the normal range
and the LOW WARNING value is reached.
• if the monitored value was in the LOWER
warning range and the LOW WARNING value +the HYSTERESIS value is reached.
• if the monitored value was in the UPPERWARNING range and the HIGH WARNING
value minus the HYSTERESIS value is reached.

Operating principle of the monitoring with an hysteresis

If the operating mode of the device status indicator is set to NAMUR. See chapter 12.4.

english157

Type 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

By default, the monitoring of the volume flow rate is disabled, and the diagnostics are all disabled.
To activate the monitoring of the volume flow rate, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Limits→Active

→

Yes.

→

Save.

Volume flow

The monitoring of the volume flow rate is active and the device status will change depending on thelimits that have been set.

→ You can configure the behaviour of an analogue output depending on the status of the device. See
chapter 18.3.3.

→ You can configure a digital output to switch every time a specific event is generated. See chapter 18.5.1
Configuring a digital output as an on/off output.

→ To enable the monitoring, i.e. to be informed when the value of the volume flow rate is outside the normal
range, enable the diagnostics. See chapter 12.10 Activating the diagnostics function.

15.4.6

Deactivating the monitoring of the volume flow rate

By default, the volume flow rate values are not monitored.
But if the monitoring of the volume flow rate is active, do the following to deactivate it:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Limits→Active

→

No.

→

Save.

Volume flow

The monitoring of the volume flow rate is inactive.
158

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.4.7

Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresisof the volume flow rate

To change the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the volume flow rate, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Limits→Settings

Volume flow

The Current settings are displayed→

Set the high error limit→

Set the low error limit→

Set the high warning limit→

Set the low warning limit→

Set the hysteresis value→

The New settings are displayed.

Save.
The limit values and the hysteresis value are changed.

159

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.4.8Resetting the default values of the error limits, the warning
limits and the hysteresis of the volume flow rate

The default values of the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the volume flow rate dependon the DN of the measurement tube:• high error value: maximum volume flow rate value authorized for the DN,• low error value: opposite value of the high error value,• high warning value: 80 % of the maximum volume flow rate value authorized for the DN,• low warning value: opposite value of the high warning value,• value of the hysteresis: 0.0 l/min.
To reset the default values of the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the volume flow rate,
do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Volume flow→

Limits→Reset to default→

Confirm.
The limit values and the hysteresis value are reset.

→

Go back to the parent menu.

160

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.4.9Enabling the cut-off function of the volume flow rate

If the absolute (and possibly damped, see chapter 15.4.2) measured volume flow rate is less than the cut-off
value plus an hysteresis value, the volume flow rate value is set to 0:• the display then shows a volume flow rate = 0.
• the outputs and the totalizers react as if the actual volume flow rate were equal to 0.

Volume flow rate

Cut-off + hysteresis

Hysteresis = 50 % of the
cut-off value

Cut-off value

0tMeasured volume flow rate
Displayed volume flow rate
Fig. 53:

Operation of the cut-off function

By default, the cut-off function is enabled.
If the cut-off function is disabled, do the following to enable it:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Volume flow→

Cut-off→

Status→Enabled→Save.
The cut-off function is enabled.

161

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.4.10 Changing the cut-off value of the volume flow rate
The default value of the cut-off volume flow rate is equal to 0.4 % of the full scale value. The full scaledepends on the DN of the measurement tube.
To change the cut-off value of the volume flow rate, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Volume flow→

Cut-off

→

Value

→
→

Set the cut-off value.
Save.
The cut-off value of the volume flow rate is changed.

15.4.11Disabling the cut-off function of the volume flow rate

If the cut-off function is enabled, do the following to disable it:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Volume flow→

Cut-off→

Status→Disabled→

Save.
The cut-off function is disabled.

162

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.4.12 Resetting the default values of all the volume flow rate
parameters
To reset all the default values of the volume flow rate parameters, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Volume flow→

Reset to default→

Confirm.
All the volume flow rate parameters are reset.

→

Go back to the parent menu.

163

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.5

Setting the parameters of the mass flow rate
(optional feature)

15.5.1

Giving a user defined name to the measured mass flow rate

The name is used to identify the process value in the user defined views and in all the menus where theprocess value is displayed (for example in the Outputs menu).
By default, the name associated to the measured mass flow rate is Mass flow.
To add a user defined name to the default name, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Mass flow→

Value name→characters.

→→.

Enter the name by selecting and confirming each character. The name can have up to 19

OK
Save the name.
The name is changed.

15.5.2

Activating the damping of the mass flow rate values andchoosing a predefined damping level

The damping makes it possible to damp the fluctuations of the measured values of the mass flow rate:• on the display,• on the totalizers,• on the outputs. The damping set for an analog output comes in addition to the damping of the mass flowrate.
The damping is not applied to the new measured value, if the 2 following conditions are met:
• a Low, Medium or High damping level is active,• and the variation between 2 values that are measured one after the other is higher than 30 % (for example
when charging the pipe or stopping the flow).
By default, the measured mass flow rate values are damped with the level Medium.

164

The Low damping level or no damping at all (None) are suited for applications/processes that need fast
response times.

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

The Medium damping level or the High damping level are suited if the mass flow rate values change slowly.

→ As an alternative to the 3 predefined damping levels Low, Medium or High, you can set your own
damping parameters. See chapter 15.5.3.

Chosen damping level is applied

Damping None: all
the fluctuations of themeasured values aretransmitted

Fig. 54:

Damping Low

Damping Medium

Damping HighNo damping if 2 consecutive measured values vary for ±30 %Operation of the available damping levels

For more information concerning the response time, refer to chapter 15.15.2.
To set a predefined damping level of the measured mass flow rate values, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Mass flow→

Damping→→

The Current settings are displayed

Choose a damping level between Low, Medium and Highdisplayed.

The New settings areSave.
The damping of the mass flow rate values is active and a predefined damping level is chosen.

165

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.5.3

Activating a user-defined damping of the mass flow rate
valuesThe damping makes it possible to damp the fluctuations of the measured values of the mass flow rate:• on the display,• on the totalizers,• on the outputs. The damping set for an analog output comes in addition to the damping of the mass flowrate.
By default, the measured mass flow rate values are damped with the level Medium.
To damp the fluctuations of the measured values, you can:→ either choose 1 of the 3 predefined damping levels: Low, Medium or High. See chapter 15.5.2.
→ Or you can set your own damping parameters with the Special damping.
With the Special damping, you can set 2 parameters:• a user-defined Response time in seconds,• the Jump threshold, i.e. a user-defined percentage. If 2 consecutive measured values vary for ± the percentage, no damping is applied to the second measured value.
To set your own damping parameters of the measured mass flow rate values, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Mass flow→

Damping→Special→Set the value of the Response time→

Choose if the Jump threshold is enabled or disabled→

If the Jump threshold is enabled, set the value.

→

The New settings are displayed

The Current settings are displayed

Save.

The special damping of the mass flow rate values is active.

166

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.5.4

Deactivating the damping of the mass flow rate values

If the damping of the mass flow rate values is active, do the following to deactivate it:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Mass flow→

Damping→

Choose None

→

Save.

.
The Current settings are displayed
The New settings are displayed.

The damping of the mass flow rate values is inactive.

15.5.5

Activating the monitoring of the mass flow rate

Because of a malfunction in the process or in the mass flow rate sensor, the measured mass flow rate value
can be too high or too low.
A monitored value can be:• in the normal operating range.
• in the warning range,• in the error range.
You can set 4 limit values: 2 error limits and 2 warning limits.

→ To set the limit values, see chapter 15.5.7 Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresisof the mass flow rate.

Fig. 55 explains how the device reacts when the monitored value enters in another range (for example, fromthe normal range into the warning range). The reaction time depends on the hysteresis value and whether
the monitored value increases or decreases.

167

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

h

h

h

h: value of the hysteresis. An hysteresis value that is equal to 0means that the device reacts assoon as a limit is reached.

h

1
2a

2b

3a

3b

A: low error limit (Error low)A

B

increasing 3amonitored
value

C

2a

3a

2a

A

B

A: Error low
B: Warning low

decreasing
3b
monitored
value

2b

1
C

C: high warning limit (Warning
high)

3b

2b

1

B: low warning limit (Warning low)

DD

D: Error high
C: Warning highD: high error limit (Error high)1: normal range of the monitoredvalue
2a: lower warning range of themonitored value
3a: lower error range of the monitored value
2b: upper warning range of themonitored value
3b: upper error range of the monitored value

Monitored
value is in theError range

Colour of the device status indicatorand generated message
Red 1) indicator, Failure message

Normal range• if the monitored value was in the normal range
and the HIGH WARNING value is reached.
• if the monitored value was in the UPPER error
range and the HIGH ERROR value minus the
HYSTERESIS value is reached.

• White 1) indicator, no message, if
the Diagnostics in the menu SAW
sensor – Parameter is inactive(default setting).
• or green 1) indicator, no message, if
the Diagnostics in the menu General
settings – DIAGNOSTICS are active.

168

1)

• if the monitored value was in the LOWER
warning range and the LOW ERROR value isreached.

• if the monitored value was in the UPPER
warning range and the HIGH ERROR value isreached.
1)
Yellow indicator, Out of specification • if the monitored value was in the LOWER error
message
range and the LOW ERROR value + the HYSTERESIS value is reached.

Warning range

Fig. 55:

Condition• if the monitored value was in the normal range
and the LOW WARNING value is reached.
• if the monitored value was in the LOWER
warning range and the LOW WARNING value +the HYSTERESIS value is reached.
• if the monitored value was in the UPPERWARNING range and the HIGH WARNING
value minus the HYSTERESIS value is reached.

Operating principle of the monitoring with an hysteresis

If the operating mode of the device status indicator is set to NAMUR. See chapter 12.4.

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

By default, the monitoring of the mass flow rate is disabled, and the diagnostics are all disabled.
To activate the monitoring of the mass flow rate, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Limits→Active

→

Yes.

→

Save.

Mass flow

The monitoring of the mass flow rate is active and the device status will change depending on the limits
that have been set.

→ You can configure the behaviour of an analogue output depending on the status of the device. See
chapter 18.3.3.

→ You can configure a digital output to switch every time a specific event is generated. See chapter 18.5.1
Configuring a digital output as an on/off output.

→ To enable the monitoring, i.e. to be informed when the value of the mass flow rate is outside the normal
range, enable the diagnostics. See chapter 12.10 Activating the diagnostics function.

15.5.6

Deactivating the monitoring of the mass flow rate

By default, the mass flow rate values are not monitored.
But if the monitoring of the mass flow rate is active, do the following to deactivate it:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Limits→Active

→

No.

→

Save.

Mass flow

The monitoring of the mass flow rate is inactive.
169

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.5.7

Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresisof the mass flow rate

To change the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the mass flow rate, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Limits→Settings

Mass flow

The Current settings are displayed→

Set the high error limit→

Set the low error limit→

Set the high warning limit→

Set the low warning limit→

Set the hysteresis value→

The New settings are displayed.

Save.
The limit values and the hysteresis value are changed.

15.5.8Resetting the default values of the error limits, the warning
limits and the hysteresis of the mass flow rate

The default values of the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the mass flow rate depend on
the DN of the measurement tube:• high error value: maximum mass flow rate value authorized for the DN,• low error value: opposite value of the high error value,• high warning value: 80 % of the maximum mass flow rate value authorized for the DN,• low warning value: opposite value of the high warning value,• value of the hysteresis: 0.0 kg/min.
To reset the default values of the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the mass flow rate, do
the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

170

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter→Stand. meas. values→

Mass flow→

Limits→Reset to default→

Confirm.
The limit values and the hysteresis value are reset.

→

Go back to the parent menu.

15.5.9Enabling the cut-off function of the mass flow rate

If the absolute (and possibly damped, see chapter 15.5.2) measured mass flow rate is less than the cut-off
value plus an hysteresis value, the mass flow rate value is set to 0:• the display then shows a mass flow rate = 0.
• the outputs and the totalizers react as if the actual mass flow rate were equal to 0.

Mass flow rate

Cut-off + hysteresis

Hysteresis = 50 % of the
cut-off value

Cut-off value

0tMeasured mass flow rate
Displayed mass flow rate
Fig. 56:

Operation of the cut-off function

By default, the cut-off function is enabled.
If the cut-off function is disabled, do the following to enable it:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values

171

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter→

Mass flow→

Cut-off→

Status→Enabled→Save.
The cut-off function is enabled.

15.5.10 Changing the cut-off value of the mass flow rate
The default value of the cut-off mass flow rate is equal to 0.4 % of the full scale value. The full scaledepends on the DN of the measurement tube.
To change the cut-off value of the mass flow rate, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Mass flow→

Cut-off

→

Value

→
→

Set the cut-off value.
Save.
The cut-off value of the mass flow rate is changed.

172

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.5.11Disabling the cut-off function of the mass flow rate

If the cut-off function is enabled, do the following to disable it:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Mass flow→

Cut-off→

Status→Disabled→

Save.
The cut-off function is disabled.

15.5.12 Resetting the default values of all the mass flow rate
parameters
To reset all the default values of the mass flow rate parameters, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Mass flow→

Reset to default→

Confirm.
All the mass flow rate parameters are reset.

→

Go back to the parent menu.

173

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.6

Setting the parameters of the liquid temperature

15.6.1

Giving a user defined name to the measured liquid
temperature

The name is used to identify the process value in the user defined views and in all the menus where theprocess value is displayed (for example in the Outputs menu).
By default, the name associated to the measured liquid temperature is Temperature.
To add a user defined name to the default name, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Temperature→

Value name→characters.

→→.

Enter the name by selecting and confirming each character. The name can have up to 19

OK
Save the name.
The name is changed.

15.6.2

Activating the damping of the liquid temperature values andchoosing a predefined damping level

The damping makes it possible to damp the fluctuations of the measured values of the liquid temperature:• on the display,• on the outputs. The damping of the liquid temperature comes in addition to the damping set for eachanalog output (see chapter 18.3.2).
The damping is not applied to the new measured value, if the 2 following conditions are met:
• a Low, Medium or High damping level is active,• and the variation between 2 values that are measured one after the other is higher than 20 °C.
The refresh time, set in chapter 15.15, has no effect on the damping of the measured values.
By default, the measured liquid temperature values are not damped.

→ As an alternative to the 3 predefined damping levels Low, Medium or High, you can set your own
damping parameters. See 15.6.3.

174

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

Chosen damping level is applied

Damping None: all
the fluctuations of themeasured values aretransmitted

Damping Low

Damping Medium

Damping HighNo damping if 2 consecutive measured values vary for ±20 °C

Fig. 57:

Operation of the available damping levels

Table 25:

Response times (10 %...90 %) of the damping levels for the liquid temperature measurements

Damping level
None
Low
MediumHigh
SpecialResponse time
0s
1s
10 s
30 s
User-defined Response time: see chapter 15.6.3

To set a predefined damping level of the measured liquid temperature values, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Temperature→Damping→→

The Current settings are displayed

Choose a damping level between Low, Medium and Highdisplayed.

The New settings areSave.
The damping of the liquid temperature values is active and a predefined damping level is chosen.

175

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.6.3

Activating a user-defined damping of the liquid temperature
valuesThe damping makes it possible to damp the fluctuations of the measured values of the liquid temperature:• on the display,• on the outputs. The damping of the liquid temperature comes in addition to the damping set for eachanalog output (see chapter 18.3.2).
By default, the measured liquid temperature values are not damped.
To damp the fluctuations of the measured values, you can:→ either choose 1 of the 3 predefined damping levels: Low, Medium or High. See chapter 15.6.2.
→ Or you can set your own damping parameters with the Special damping.
With the Special damping, you can set 2 parameters:• a user-defined Response time in seconds,• the Jump threshold, i.e. a user-defined temperature value. If 2 consecutive measured values vary for ±the set temperature value, no damping is applied to the second measured value.
To set your own damping parameters of the measured liquid temperature values, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Temperature→Damping→Special→Set the value of the Response time→

Choose if the Jump threshold is enabled or disabled→

If the Jump threshold is enabled, set the value.

→

The New settings are displayed

The Current settings are displayed

Save.

The special damping of the liquid temperature values is active.

176

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.6.4

Deactivating the damping of the liquid temperature values

By default, the liquid temperature values are not damped.
But if the damping of the liquid temperature values is active, do the following to deactivate it:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Temperature→Damping→

Choose None

→

Save.

The Current settings are displayed
The New settings are displayed.

The damping of the liquid temperature values is inactive.

15.6.5

Activating the monitoring of the liquid temperature

If the temperature sensor is defective, the monitoring of the liquid temperature has no effect. In thatcase:
• the display shows "— —".
• the message" No temperature sensor detected" is displayed.
Because of a malfunction in the process, the measured liquid temperature value can be too high or too low.
A monitored value can be:• in the normal operating range.
• in the warning range,• in the error range.
You can set 4 limit values: 2 error limits and 2 warning limits.

→ To set the limit values, see chapter 15.6.7 Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresisof the liquid temperature.

Fig. 52 in chapter 15.4.5 explains how the device reacts when the monitored value enters in another range(for example, from the normal range into the warning range). The reaction time depends on the hysteresis
value and if the monitored value increases or decreases.
By default, the monitoring of the liquid temperature and the diagnostics are all disabled.
To activate the monitoring of the liquid temperature, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor
177

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Temperature→

Limits→Active

→

Yes.

→

Save.

The monitoring of the liquid temperature is active and the device status will change depending on thelimits that have been set.

→ You can configure the behaviour of an analogue output depending on the status of the device. See
chapter 18.3.3.

→ You can configure a digital output to switch every time a specific event is generated. See chapter 18.5.1
Configuring a digital output as an on/off output.

→ To enable the monitoring, i.e. to be informed when the value of the liquid temperature is outside thenormal range, enable the diagnostics. See chapter 12.10 Activating the diagnostics function.

15.6.6

Deactivating the monitoring of the liquid temperature

By default, the liquid temperature values are not monitored. If the monitoring of the liquid temperature is
active, do the following to deactivate it:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Limits→Active

→

No

→

Save.

Temperature

The monitoring of the liquid temperature is inactive.

178

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.6.7

Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresisof the liquid temperature

To change the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the liquid temperature, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Temperature→

Limits→Settings

The Current settings are displayed→

Set the high error limit→

Set the low error limit→

Set the high warning limit→

Set the low warning limit→

Set the hysteresis value→

The New settings are displayed.

Save.
The limit values and the hysteresis value are changed.

15.6.8Resetting the default values of the error limits, the warning limits
and the hysteresis of the liquid temperature

The default values of the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the liquid temperature are thefollowing:• high error value: 150.0 °C,• low error value: –20.0 °C,• high warning value: 140.0 °C,• low warning value: –10.0 °C,• value of the hysteresis: 0.0 °C.
To reset the default values of the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the liquid temperature,
do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor
179

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Temperature→

Limits→Reset to default

Confirm.

The limit values and the hysteresis value are reset.

→

Go back to the parent menu.

15.6.9Resetting the default values of all the liquid temperatureparameters

To reset all the default values of the liquid temperature parameters, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Temperature→

Reset to default→

Confirm.
All the liquid temperature parameters are reset.

→

Go back to the parent menu.

180

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.7

Setting the parameters of the liquid velocity

15.7.1

Giving a user defined name to the measured liquid velocity

The name is used to identify the process value in the user defined views and in all the menus where theprocess value is displayed (for example in the Outputs menu).
By default, the name associated to the measured liquid velocity is Liquid velocity.
To add a user defined name to the default name, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Liquid velocity→

Value name→characters.

→→.

Enter the name by selecting and confirming each character. The name can have up to 19

OK
Save the name.
The name is changed.

15.7.2

Activating the damping of the liquid velocity values andchoosing a predefined damping level

The damping of the liquid velocity comes in addition to the damping set for the volume flow. The damping
makes it possible to damp the fluctuations of the measured values of the liquid velocity:• on the display,• on the outputs. The damping of the liquid velocity comes in addition to the damping set for each analog
output (see chapter 18.3.2).
The damping is not applied to the new measured value, if the 2 following conditions are met:
• a Low, Medium or High damping level is active,• and the variation between 2 values that are measured one after the other is higher than 30 % (for example
when charging the pipe or stopping the flow).
By default, the liquid velocity values are not damped.

→ As an alternative to the 3 predefined damping levels Low, Medium or High, you can set your own
damping parameters. See 15.7.3.

181

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

Chosen damping level is applied

Damping None: all
the fluctuations of themeasured values aretransmitted

Damping Low

Damping Medium

Damping HighNo damping if 2 consecutive measured values vary for ±30 %Fig. 58:

Operation of the available damping levels

Table 26:

Response times (10 %...90 %) of the damping levels for the liquid velocity measurements

None

Response time which is associated with the damping level
chosen for the volume flow plus...
• 5 s if the Refresh time is set to Long

Low
MediumHigh
Special• < 0.5 s if the Refresh time is set to Short or Very short.
...1 s...10 s...30 s...User-defined Response time: see chapter 15.7.3

Damping level

To set a predefined damping level of the measured liquid velocity values, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Liquid velocity→

Damping→→

The Current settings are displayed

Choose a damping level between Low, Medium and Highdisplayed.

The New settings areSave.
The damping of the liquid velocity values is active and a predefined damping level is chosen.

182

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.7.3

Activating a user-defined damping of the liquid velocity values

The damping makes it possible to damp the fluctuations of the measured values of the liquid velocity:• on the display,• on the outputs. The damping of the liquid velocity comes in addition to the damping set for each analog
output (see chapter 18.3.2).
By default, the measured liquid velocity values are not damped.
To damp the fluctuations of the measured values, you can:→ either choose 1 of the 3 predefined damping levels: Low, Medium or High. See chapter 15.7.2.
→ Or you can set your own damping parameters with the Special damping.
With the Special damping, you can set 2 parameters:• a user-defined Response time in seconds,• the Jump threshold, i.e. a user-defined percentage. If 2 consecutive measured values vary for ± the percentage, no damping is applied to the second measured value.
To set your own damping parameters of the measured liquid velocity values, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Liquid velocity→

Damping→Special→Set the value of the Response time→

Choose if the Jump threshold is enabled or disabled→

If the Jump threshold is enabled, set the value.

→

Save.

The Current settings are displayed

The New settings are displayed.

The special damping of the liquid velocity values is active.

183

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.7.4

Deactivating the damping of the liquid velocity values

By default, the liquid velocity values are not damped.
But if the damping of the liquid velocity values is active, do the following to deactivate it:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Liquid velocity→

Damping→

Choose None

→

Save.

The Current settings are displayed
The New settings are displayed.

The damping of the liquid velocity values is inactive.

15.7.5

Activating the monitoring of the liquid velocity

Because of a malfunction in the process or in the flow rate sensor, the measured liquid velocity value can be
too high or too low.
A monitored value can be:• in the normal operating range.
• in the warning range,• in the error range.
You can set 4 limit values: 2 error limits and 2 warning limits.

→ To set the limit values, see chapter 15.7.7 Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresisof the liquid velocity.

Fig. 52 in 15.4.5 explains how the device reacts when the monitored value enters in another range (forexample, from the normal range into the warning range). The reaction time depends on the hysteresis value
and if the monitored value increases or decreases.
By default, the monitoring of the liquid velocity and the diagnostics are all disabled.
To activate the monitoring of the liquid velocity, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.

184→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Liquid velocity

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter→

Limits→Active

→

Yes.

→

Save.

The monitoring of the liquid velocity is active and the device status will change depending on the limits
that have been set.

→ You can configure the behaviour of an analogue output depending on the status of the device. See
chapter 18.3.3.

→ You can configure a digital output to switch every time a specific event is generated. See chapter 18.5.1
Configuring a digital output as an on/off output.

→ To enable the monitoring, i.e. to be informed when the value of the liquid velocity is outside the normal
range, enable the diagnostics. See chapter 12.10 Activating the diagnostics function.

15.7.6

Deactivating the monitoring of the liquid velocity

By default, the liquid velocity values are not monitored.
But if the monitoring of the liquid velocity is active, do the following to deactivate it:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Liquid velocity→

Active

→

No.

→

Save.

LimitsThe monitoring of the liquid velocity is inactive.

185

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.7.7

Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresisof the liquid velocity

To change the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the liquid velocity, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Limits→Settings

Liquid velocity

The Current settings are displayed→

Set the high error limit→

Set the low error limit→

Set the high warning limit→

Set the low warning limit→

Set the hysteresis value→

The New settings are displayed.

Save.
The limit values and the hysteresis value are changed.

15.7.8Resetting the default values of the error limits, the warning
limits and the hysteresis of the liquid velocity

The default values of the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the liquid velocity are thefollowing:• high error value: +10.0 m/s,
• low error value: –10.0 m/s,
• high warning value: +8.0 m/s,
• low warning value: –8.0 m/s,
• value of the hysteresis: 0.0 m/s.
To reset the default values of the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the liquid velocity, do
the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

186

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter→Stand. meas. values→

Liquid velocity→

Limits→Reset to default→

Confirm.
The limit values and the hysteresis value are reset.

→

Go back to the parent menu.

15.7.9Resetting the default values of all the liquid velocity
parameters

To reset all the default values of all the liquid velocity parameters, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Liquid velocity→

Reset to default→

Confirm.
All the liquid velocity parameters are reset.

→

Go back to the parent menu.

→

Confirm.

187

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.8

Setting the parameters of the liquid density (optionalfeature)15.8.1

Giving a user defined name to the measured liquid density

The name is used to identify the process value in the user defined views and in all the menus where theprocess value is displayed (for example in the Outputs menu).
By default, the name associated to the measured liquid density is Density.
To add a user defined name to the default name, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Density→

Value name→characters.

→→.

Enter the name by selecting and confirming each character. The name can have up to 19

OK
Save the name.
The name is changed.

15.8.2

Activating the damping of the liquid density values andchoosing a predefined damping level

The damping makes it possible to damp the fluctuations of the measured values of the liquid density:• on the display,• on the outputs. The damping of the liquid density comes in addition to the damping set for each analog
output (see chapter 18.3.2),• The damping of the liquid density comes in addition to the damping set for the mass flow rate.
The damping is not applied to the new measured value, if the 2 following conditions are met:
• a Low, Medium or High damping level is active,• and the variation between 2 values that are measured one after the other is higher than 30 % (for example
when charging the pipe or stopping the flow).
By default, the measured liquid density values are damped with the level Medium.

→ As an alternative to the 3 predefined damping levels Low, Medium or High, you can set your own
188

damping parameters. See 15.8.3.

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

Chosen damping level is applied

Damping None: all
the fluctuations of themeasured values aretransmitted

Low damping

Damping Medium

Damping HighNo damping if 2 consecutive measured values vary for ±30 %Fig. 59:

Operation of the available damping levels

Table 27:

Response times (10 %...90 %) of the damping levels for the liquid density measurements

None

Response time which is associated with the damping level
chosen for the liquid density• 0.5 s if the Refresh time is set to Long

Low
MediumHigh
Special• 1 s if the Refresh time is set to Short or Very short.
3s
10 s
30 s
User-defined Response time

Damping level

To set a predefined damping level of the measured liquid density values, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Density→

Damping→→

The Current settings are displayed

Choose a damping level between Low, Medium and Highdisplayed.

The New settings areSave.
The damping of the liquid density values is active and a predefined damping level is chosen.

189

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.8.3

Activating a user-defined damping of the liquid density values

The damping makes it possible to damp the fluctuations of the measured values of the liquid density:• on the display,• on the outputs. The damping of the liquid density comes in addition to the damping set for each analog
output (see chapter 18.3.2).
• The damping of the liquid density comes in addition to the damping set for the mass flow rate.
To damp the fluctuations of the measured values, you can:→ either choose 1 of the 3 predefined damping levels: Low, Medium or High. See chapter 15.8.2.
By default, the measured liquid density values are damped with the level Medium.

→ Or you can set your own damping parameters with the Special damping.
With the Special damping, you can set 2 parameters:• a user-defined Response time in seconds,• the Jump threshold, i.e. a user-defined percentage. If 2 consecutive measured values vary for ± the percentage, no damping is applied to the second measured value.
To set your own damping parameters of the measured liquid density values, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Density→

Damping→Special→Set the value of the Response time→

Choose if the Jump threshold is enabled or disabled→

If the Jump threshold is enabled, set the value.

→

Save.

The Current settings are displayed

The special damping of the liquid density values is active.

190

englishThe New settings are displayed.

Type 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.8.4

Deactivating the damping of the liquid density values

By default, the measured liquid density values are damped with the level Medium.
To deactivate the damping of the liquid density values, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Density→

Damping→

Choose None

→

Save.

The Current settings are displayed
The New settings are displayed.

The damping of the liquid density values is inactive.

15.8.5

Activating the monitoring of the liquid density

Because of a malfunction in the process or in the flow rate sensor, the measured liquid density value can be
too high or too low.
A monitored value can be:• in the normal operating range.
• in the warning range,• in the error range.
You can set 4 limit values: 2 error limits and 2 warning limits.

→ To set the limit values, see chapter 15.8.7 Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresisof the liquid density.

Fig. 52 in 15.4.5 explains how the device reacts when the monitored value enters in another range (forexample, from the normal range into the warning range). The reaction time depends on the hysteresis value
and if the monitored value increases or decreases.
By default, the monitoring of the liquid density and the diagnostics are all disabled.
To activate the monitoring of the liquid density, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Density191

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter→

Limits→Active

→

Yes.

→

Save.

The monitoring of the liquid density is active and the device status will change depending on the limits
that have been set.

→ You can configure the behaviour of an analogue output depending on the status of the device. See
chapter 18.3.3.

→ You can configure a digital output to switch every time a specific event is generated. See chapter 18.5.1
Configuring a digital output as an on/off output.

→ To enable the monitoring, i.e. to be informed when the value of the liquid density is outside the normal
range, enable the diagnostics. See chapter 12.10 Activating the diagnostics function.

15.8.6

Deactivating the monitoring of the liquid density

By default, the liquid density values are not monitored.
But if the monitoring of the liquid density is active, do the following to deactivate it:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Density→

Active

→

No.

→

Save.

LimitsThe monitoring of the liquid density is inactive.

192

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.8.7

Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresisof the liquid density

To change the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the liquid density, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Limits→Settings

Density

The Current settings are displayed→

Set the high error limit→

Set the low error limit→

Set the high warning limit→

Set the low warning limit→

Set the hysteresis value→

The New settings are displayed.

Save.
The limit values and the hysteresis value are changed.

15.8.8Resetting the default values of the error limits, the warning
limits and the hysteresis of the liquid density

The default values of the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the liquid density are thefollowing:• high error value: 2.0 g/cm3,• low error value: 0.5 g/cm3,• high warning value: 1.6 g/cm3,• low warning value: 0.6 g/cm3,• value of the hysteresis: 0 g/cm3.
To reset the default values of the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the liquid density, do
the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.
193

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter→Stand. meas. values→

Density→

Limits→Reset to default→

Confirm.
The limit values and the hysteresis value are reset.

→

Go back to the parent menu.

15.8.9Setting the measurement mode of liquid density

Density mode can be selected through the following values:• Measured (value measured via SAW signals, and liquid temperature)• Water (value calculated based on liquid temperature measured by FLOWave)• Constant (value set to a constant value)• Linear (r = a+bT; coefficients a and b to be set by installer, T in °C)• Quadratic (r = a+bT+cT2; coefficients a, b and c to be set by installer, T in °C)
When option Density is ordered, default density mode will be Measured.

→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Density→Mode

The Current settings are displayed.

→

Choose the density mode between Measured, Water, Constant, Linear, Quadratic→

If coefficients have to be set (in Constant, Linear, Quadratic mode), then set the values

194

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.8.10 Resetting the default values of all the liquid density
parameters
To reset all the default values of all the liquid density parameters, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Density→

Reset to default→

Confirm.
All the liquid density parameters are reset.

→

Go back to the parent menu.

→

Confirm.

195

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.9

Setting the parameters of the volume totalizers

15.9.1

Giving a user defined name to each volume totalizer

The name is used to identify the process value in the user defined views and in all the menus where theprocess value is displayed (for example in the Outputs menu).
By default, the names associated to the volume totalizers are Totalizer 1 and Totalizer 2.
To add a user defined name to the default name of a volume totalizer, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Totalizer 1 or Totalizer 2→

Value name→characters.

→→.

Enter the name by selecting and confirming each character. The name can have up to 19

OK
Save the name.
The name is changed.

15.9.2Choosing the counting direction of each volume totalizer

By default, the counting direction of both volume totalizers is Positive only.
The possible counting directions are:• Positive only: the volume totalizer counts the volume of liquid that flows in the direction defined as
positive, i.e. in the same direction as the arrow located on the front of the device.
• Negative only: the volume totalizer counts the volume of liquid that flows in the direction defined as
negative, i.e. in the direction opposite to the direction of the arrow located on the front of the device.
• Both: the volume totalizer counts the volume of liquid that flows in the direction defined as positive but
deducts the volume of liquid that flows in the direction defined as negative.
To change the counting direction of each volume totalizer, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.

196→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values

englishTotalizer 1 or Totalizer 2

Type 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter→

Counting direction→

Choose a counting direction.

→

Save.

.

The counting direction is changed.

15.9.3

Activating the monitoring of each volume totalizer value

A monitored value can be:• in the normal operating range.
• in the warning range,• in the error range.
You can set 4 limit values: 2 error limits and 2 warning limits.

→ To set the limit values, see chapter 15.9.5 Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresisof each volume totalizer.

Fig. 52 in 15.4.5 explains how the device reacts when the monitored value enters in another range (forexample, from the normal range into the warning range). The reaction time depends on the hysteresis value
and if the monitored value increases or decreases.
By default, the monitoring of the volume totalizers and the diagnostics are all disabled.
To activate the monitoring of each volume totalizer, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Limits→Active

→

Yes

→

Save.

Totalizer 1 or Totalizer 2

The monitoring of the volume totalizer is active and the device status will change depending on the limits
that have been set.

→ You can configure the behaviour of an analogue output depending on the status of the device. See
chapter 18.3.3.

→ You can configure a digital output to switch every time a specific event is generated. See chapter 18.5.1
Configuring a digital output as an on/off output.

→ To enable the monitoring, i.e. to be informed when the value of a volume totalizer is outside the normal
range, enable the diagnostics. See chapter 12.10 Activating the diagnostics function.

english197

Type 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.9.4

Deactivating the monitoring of each volume totalizer

By default, the volume totalizers are not monitored.
But if the monitoring of a volume totalizer is active, do the following to deactivate it:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Limits→Active

→

No.

→

Save.

Totalizer 1 or Totalizer 2

The monitoring of the volume totalizer is inactive.

15.9.5

Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresisof each volume totalizer

To change the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of each volume totalizer, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Limits→Settings

The Current settings are displayed→

Set the high error limit→

Set the low error limit→

Set the high warning limit→

Set the low warning limit→

Set the hysteresis value→
198

Totalizer 1 or Totalizer 2

The New settings are displayed.

Save.
The limit values and the hysteresis value are changed.

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.9.6

Resetting the default values of the error limits, the warning
limits and the hysteresis of each volume totalizer

The default values of the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the volume totalizers are thefollowing:• high error value: 10,000,000 m3,• low error value: –10,000,000 m3,• high warning value: 8,000,000 m3,• low warning value: –8,000,000 m3,• value of the hysteresis: 0.0 m3.
To reset the default values of the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of each volume totalizer,
do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Limits→Reset to default→

Confirm.

Totalizer 1 or Totalizer 2

The limit values and the hysteresis value are reset.

→

Go back to the parent menu.

15.9.7

Enabling the user to start, stop or reset each volume totalizer

By default, the user is not allowed to start, to stop or to reset a volume totalizer.
To authorize the user to start, to stop or to reset a volume totalizer, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Start/Stop/Reset→

Enabled→

Save.

Totalizer 1 or Totalizer 2

The user is authorized to start, to stop or to reset a volume totalizer.

199

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.9.8Disabling the user to start, stop or reset each volume totalizer

By default, the user is not allowed to start, to stop or to reset a volume totalizer.
If the Start/Stop/Reset of a volume totalizer is active, do the following to disable them:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Start/Stop/Reset→

Disabled→

Save.

Totalizer 1 or Totalizer 2

The user is not authorized to start or to stop or to reset a volume totalizer.

15.9.9Starting each volume totalizer

If the Start/Stop/Reset of a volume totalizer is active, do the following to start the volume totalizer:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Start/Stop→

Started→

Save.

Totalizer 1 or Totalizer 2

The volume totalizer starts to count.

15.9.10 Stopping each volume totalizer
If the Start/Stop/Reset of a volume totalizer is active, do the following to stop the volume totalizer:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Start/Stop→

Stopped→Save.
The volume totalizer stops counting.

200

englishTotalizer 1 or Totalizer 2

Type 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.9.11

Resetting each volume totalizer to a Preset value

If the Start/Stop/Reset of a volume totalizer is active, do the following to reset the volume totalizer to thePreset value:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Value reset→

Confirm.

Totalizer 1 or Totalizer 2

The volume totalizer is reset to the preset value.

→ To change the preset value of a volume totalizer, see chapter 15.9.12 Changing the Preset value for a
volume totalizer reset.

15.9.12 Changing the Preset value for a volume totalizer reset
The default value of the Preset value is 0.0 l.
If the Start/Stop/Reset of a volume totalizer is active, do the following to change the preset value:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Totalizer 1 or Totalizer 2→

Preset value→→

Set the value.
Save.
The value is changed.

201

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.9.13 Resetting the overflow counter of each volume totalizer
If a volume totalizer reaches its maximum value, the associated overflow counter value is incremented by 1.
To reset the overflow counter associated to each volume totalizer, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Totalizer 1 or Totalizer 2→

Reset overflow counter→

Confirm.
The overflow counter associated to the volume totalizer is reset.

15.9.14 Resetting all the parameters of each volume totalizer to theirdefault values
To reset all the parameters of each volume totalizer to their default values, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Totalizer 1 or Totalizer 2→

Reset to default

Confirm.

All the parameters of each volume totalizer are reset to their default values.

→

Go back to the parent menu.

202

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.10

Setting the parameters of the mass totalizers(optional feature)

15.10.1

Giving a user defined name to each mass totalizer

The name is used to identify the process value in the user defined views and in all the menus where theprocess value is displayed (for example in the Outputs menu).
By default, the names associated to the mass totalizers are Mass totalizer 1 and Mass totalizer 2.
To add a user defined name to the default name of a mass totalizer, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Mass totalizer 1 or Mass totalizer 2→

Value name→→→characters.

.

Enter the name by selecting and confirming each character. The name can have up to 19

OK
Save the name.
The name is changed.

15.10.2 Choosing the counting direction of each mass totalizer
By default, the counting direction of both mass totalizers is Positive only.
The possible counting directions are:• Positive only: the mass totalizer counts the mass of liquid that flows in the direction defined as positive,
i.e. in the same direction as the arrow located on the front of the device.
• Negative only: the mass totalizer counts the mass of liquid that flows in the direction defined as negative,
i.e. in the direction opposite to the direction of the arrow located on the front of the device.
• Both: the mass totalizer counts the mass of liquid that flows in the direction defined as positive but
deducts the mass of liquid that flows in the direction defined as negative.
To change the counting direction of each mass totalizer, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.
203

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter→Stand. meas. values→

Mass totalizer 1 or Mass totalizer 2→

Counting direction→

Choose a counting direction.

→

Save.

.

The counting direction is changed.

15.10.3 Activating the monitoring of each mass totalizer value
A monitored value can be:• in the normal operating range.
• in the warning range,• in the error range.
You can set 4 limit values: 2 error limits and 2 warning limits.

→ To set the limit values, see chapter 15.10.5 Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of each mass totalizer.

Fig. 52 in 15.4.5 explains how the device reacts when the monitored value enters in another range (forexample, from the normal range into the warning range). The reaction time depends on the hysteresis value
and if the monitored value increases or decreases.
By default, the monitoring of the mass totalizers and the diagnostics are all disabled.
To activate the monitoring of each mass totalizer, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Mass totalizer 1 or Mass totalizer 2→

Limits→Active

→

Yes

→

Save.

The monitoring of the mass totalizer is active and the device status will change depending on the limits
that have been set.
204

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter→ You can configure the behaviour of an analogue output depending on the status of the device. See
chapter 18.3.3.

→ You can configure a digital output to switch every time a specific event is generated. See chapter 18.5.1
Configuring a digital output as an on/off output.

→ To enable the monitoring, i.e. to be informed when the value of a mass totalizer is outside the normal
range, enable the diagnostics. See chapter 12.10 Activating the diagnostics function.

15.10.4 Deactivating the monitoring of each mass totalizer
By default, the mass totalizers are not monitored.
But if the monitoring of a mass totalizer is active, do the following to deactivate it:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Mass totalizer 1 or Mass totalizer 2→

Limits→Active

→

No.

→

Save.
The monitoring of the mass totalizer is inactive.

15.10.5 Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresisof each mass totalizer
To change the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of each mass totalizer, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Mass totalizer 1 or Mass totalizer 2→

Limits→Settings→

The Current settings are displayed

Set the high error limit
205

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter→

Set the low error limit→

Set the high warning limit→

Set the low warning limit→

Set the hysteresis value→

The New settings are displayed.

Save.
The limit values and the hysteresis value are changed.

15.10.6 Resetting the default values of the error limits, the warning
limits and the hysteresis of each mass totalizer
The default values of the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the mass totalizers are thefollowing:• high error value: 10,000,000 t,• low error value: –10,000,000 t,• high warning value: 8,000,000 t,• low warning value: –8,000,000 t,• value of the hysteresis: 0.0 t.
To reset the default values of the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of each mass totalizer, do
the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Limits→Reset to default→

Confirm.

Mass totalizer 1 or Mass totalizer 2

The limit values and the hysteresis value are reset.

→

Go back to the parent menu.

206

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.10.7 Enabling the user to start, stop or reset each mass totalizer
By default, the user is not allowed to start, to stop or to reset a mass totalizer.
To authorize the user to start, to stop or to reset a mass totalizer, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Start/Stop/Reset→

Enabled→Save.

Mass totalizer 1 or Mass totalizer 2

The user is authorized to start, to stop or to reset a mass totalizer.

15.10.8 Disabling the user to start, stop or reset each mass totalizer
By default, the user is not allowed to start, to stop or to reset a mass totalizer.
If the Start/Stop/Reset of a mass totalizer is active, do the following to disable them:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Mass totalizer 1 or Mass totalizer 2→

Start/Stop/Reset→

Disabled→

Save.
The user is not authorized to start or to stop or to reset a mass totalizer.

207

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.10.9 Starting each mass totalizer
If the Start/Stop/Reset of a mass totalizer is active, do the following to start the mass totalizer:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Mass totalizer 1 or Mass totalizer 2→

Start/Stop→

Started→Save.
The mass totalizer starts to count.

15.10.10 Stopping each mass totalizer
If the Start/Stop/Reset of a mass totalizer is active, do the following to stop the mass totalizer:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Start/Stop→

Stopped→Save.
The mass totalizer stops counting.

208

englishMass totalizer 1 or Mass totalizer 2

Type 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.10.11 Resetting each mass totalizer to a Preset value
If the Start/Stop/Reset of a mass totalizer is active, do the following to reset the mass totalizer to the Preset
value:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Mass totalizer 1 or Mass totalizer 2→

Value reset→

Confirm.
The mass totalizer is reset to the preset value.

→ To change the preset value of a mass totalizer, see chapter 15.10.12 Changing the Preset value for amass totalizer reset.

15.10.12 Changing the Preset value for a mass totalizer reset
The default value of the Preset value is 0.0 kg.
If the Start/Stop/Reset of a mass totalizer is active, do the following to change the preset value:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Mass totalizer 1 or Mass totalizer 2→

Preset value→→

Set the value.
Save.
The value is changed.

209

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.10.13 Resetting the overflow counter of each mass totalizer
If a mass totalizer reaches its maximum value, the associated overflow counter value is incremented by 1.
To reset the overflow counter associated to each mass totalizer, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Mass totalizer 1 or Mass totalizer 2→

Reset overflow counter→

Confirm.
The overflow counter associated to the mass totalizer is reset.

15.10.14 Resetting all the parameters of each mass totalizer to theirdefault values
To reset all the parameters of each mass totalizer to their default values, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Stand. meas. values→

Mass totalizer 1 or Mass totalizer 2→

Reset to default

Confirm.

All the parameters of each mass totalizer are reset to their default values.

→

Go back to the parent menu.

210

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.11

Setting the parameters of the differentiation factor(optional feature)

15.11.1

What is the differentiation factor?

The differentiation factor (DF) is a dimensionless measurement value which can be used to identify the liquid
flowing through the pipe.
Before SW version A.05.00.00, differentiation factor was named density factor. Given the fact that the option
density appeared, the name was changed in order to avoid confusion.
The DF is a non-calibrated acoustic measurement based on the measurement of the speed of sound in theliquid and can be compensated by temperature. The DF gives an idea of the density of most of aqueous
liquids. By default, the temperature compensation is related to water.

→ To set a temperature compensation, refer to chapter 15.11.10.
Air bubbles in the liquid have an unwanted effect on the DF accuracy.
The device measures DFs in the range of 0.8...1.3.
• If a liquid flowing through the pipe has a higher density than water, the measured DF is higher than 1.
• If a liquid flowing through the pipe has a lower density than water, the measured DF is lower than 1.
Examples of DF ranges:• The DF of water is in the range of 0.95...1.05.
• The DF of tomato ketchup is in the range of 1.1...1.3.

15.11.2

Giving a user defined name to the measured differentiation
factor

The name is used to identify the process value in the user defined views and in all the menus where theprocess value is displayed (for example in the Outputs menu).
By default, the name associated to the measured DF is DF.
To add a user defined name to the default name, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→Add. meas. values

→

DF

→

Value name→.

Enter the name by selecting and confirming each character. The name can have up to 19
characters.

→→

OK
Save the name.
The name is changed.

211

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.11.3

Activating the damping of the differentiation factor values andchoosing a predefined damping level

The damping makes it possible to damp the fluctuations of the measured values of the DF:• on the display,• on the totalizers,• on the outputs. The damping set for an analog output comes in addition to the damping of the DF.
The damping is not applied to the new measured value, if the 2 following conditions are met:
• a Low, Medium or High damping level is active,• and the variation between 2 values that are measured one after the other is higher than 30 % (for example
when changing the liquid in the pipe).
By default, the DF values are damped with the level None.
The Low damping level or no damping at all (None) are suited for applications/processes that need fast
response times.
The Medium damping level or the High damping level are suited if the DF values change slowly.

→ As an alternative to the 3 predefined damping levels Low, Medium or High, you can set your own
damping parameters. See chapter 15.11.4.

Chosen damping level is applied

Damping None: all
the fluctuations of themeasured values aretransmitted

Damping Low

Damping Medium

No damping if 2 consecutive measured values vary for ±30 %Fig. 60:

Operation of the available damping levels

Table 28:

Response times (10 %...90 %) of the damping levels for the DF measurements

Damping level
None
Low
MediumHigh
Special212

englishDamping HighResponse time
0s
1s
10 s
30 s
User-defined Response time: see chapter 15.11.4

Type 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – ParameterTo set a predefined damping level of the DF, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→Add. meas. values

→

DF

→

Damping→→

The Current settings are displayed

Choose a damping level between Low, Medium and Highdisplayed.

The New settings areSave.
The damping of the DF values is active and a predefined damping level is chosen.

15.11.4

Activating a user-defined damping of the differentiation factor
valuesThe damping makes it possible to damp the fluctuations of the measured values of the DF:• on the display,• on the totalizers,• on the outputs. The damping set for an analog output comes in addition to the damping of the DF.
By default, the measured DF values are damped with the level None.
To damp the fluctuations of the measured values, you can:→ either choose 1 of the 3 predefined damping levels: Low, Medium or High. See chapter 15.11.3.
→ Or you can set your own damping parameters with the Special damping.
With the Special damping, you can set 2 parameters:• a user-defined Response time in seconds,• the Jump threshold, i.e. a user-defined percentage. If 2 consecutive measured values vary for ± the percentage, no damping is applied to the second measured value.
To set your own damping parameters of the DF values, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→Add. meas. values
213

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

→

DF

→

Damping→Special→Set the value of the Response time→

Choose if the Jump threshold is enabled or disabled→

If the Jump threshold is enabled, set the value.

→

The New settings are displayed

The Current settings are displayed

Save.

The special damping of the DF values is active.

15.11.5

Deactivating the damping of the differentiation factor values

If the damping of the DF values is active, do the following to deactivate it:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→Add. meas. values

→

DF

→

Damping→

Choose None

→

Save.

.
The Current settings are displayed
The New settings are displayed.

The damping of the DF values is inactive.

214

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.11.6

Activating the monitoring of the differentiation factor→ Before activating the monitoring of the DF, set the DF error and warning limits. See chapter 15.11.8.
By default, the monitoring of the DF and the diagnostics are all disabled.
To activate the monitoring of the DF, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→Add. meas. values

→

DF

→

Limits→Active

→

Save.

Yes.

The monitoring of the DF is active and the device status will change depending on the limits that havebeen set.

→ You can transmit the DF value with an analogue output to a PLC for example to identify the liquid flowing
through the pipe.

→ You can configure the behaviour of an analogue output depending on the status of the device. See
chapter 18.3.3.

→ You can configure a digital output to switch every time a specific event is generated. See chapter 18.5.1
Configuring a digital output as an on/off output.

→ To enable the monitoring, i.e. to be informed when the value of the DF is outside the normal range,
enable the diagnostics. See chapter 12.10 Activating the diagnostics function.

15.11.7

Deactivating the monitoring of the differentiation factor

By default, the DF values are not monitored. If the monitoring of the DF is active, do the following to deactivate it:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→Add. meas. values

→

DF

→

Limits215

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter→

Active

→

No.

→

Save.
The monitoring of the DF is inactive.

15.11.8

Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresisof the differentiation factor

A monitored value can be:• in the normal operating range.
• in the warning range,• in the error range.
You can set 4 limit values: 2 error limits and 2 warning limits.
Fig. 52 in 15.4.5 explains how the device reacts when the monitored value enters in another range (forexample, from the normal range into the warning range). The reaction time depends on the hysteresis value
and if the monitored value increases or decreases.
By default, the monitoring of the DF and the diagnostics are all disabled.
To change the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the DF, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→Add. meas. values

→

DF

→

Limits→Settings

The Current settings are displayed→

Set the high error limit→

Set the low error limit→

Set the high warning limit→

Set the low warning limit→

Set the hysteresis value→

The New settings are displayed.

Save.
The limit values and the hysteresis value are changed.

216

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.11.9

Resetting the default values of the error limits, the warning
limits and the hysteresis of the differentiation factor

The default values of the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the DF are the following:• high error value: 1.6000• low error value: 0.5000,• high warning value: 1.5000,• low warning value: 0.6000• value of the hysteresis: 0.0100.
To reset the default values of the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the DF, do thefollowing:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→Add. meas. values→

Limits→Reset to default→

Confirm.

DF

The limit values and the hysteresis value are reset.

→

Go back to the parent menu.

217

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.11.10 Setting the temperature compensation to measure thedifferentiation factor
All equations used in order to get liquid concentration values are using the default DF temperaturecompensation. When changing the DF temperature compensation, you may alter the liquid concentration measurement.
In order that the DF of the liquid stays constant whatever the liquid temperature, the DF must be temperature compensated.

→ You can only set the temperature compensation for 1 of the liquids that may flow through the pipe.
The device has 2 types of temperature compensations to measure the DF:• according to an equation that is specific to water, i.e. when water flows through the pipe, the DF will
always be equal to 1, whatever the water temperature. The equation for water cannot be changed. See
chapter 15.11.12 Activating the temperature compensation for water.
• according to an equation of 5th order for which you can set the 5 constants. See chapter 15.11.11 Setting
the temperature compensation for a liquid other than water.
By default, the temperature compensation is made according to an equation that is specific to water andthat cannot be changed.

15.11.11 Setting the temperature compensation for a liquid other thanwater
You can set the 6 constants (a0...a5) of the equation which compensates the temperature of the liquid to
calculate the DF:
a0 + a1T + a2T2 + a3T3 + a4T4 + a5T5

→ To help you define the 5 constants a0 to a5, contact Bürkert.
To activate the temperature compensation for a liquid other than water, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→Add. meas. values

→

DF

→

Compensation→

Confirm.

→

Manual→→The current settings are displayed.

Confirm.

Set the value of the constant a0, in the scientific notation. For example, to set the value 0.93724,
enter 93.724000E-02 or, to set the value 372.4, enter 3.724000E+02.
Confirm.

218

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter→→

Set the value of the constant a1, in the scientific notation.
Confirm.

→→

Set the value of the constant a2, in the scientific notation.
Confirm.

→→

Set the value of the constant a3, in the scientific notation.
Confirm.

→→

Set the value of the constant a4, in the scientific notation.
Confirm.

→

Set the value of the constant a5, in the scientific notation.

→

Confirm→

Save.

The new settings are displayed.

The temperature compensation for a liquid other than water is active.

15.11.12 Activating the temperature compensation for water
To activate the temperature compensation for water, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→Add. meas. values

→

DF

→

Compensation→

Confirm.

→

Water

→

Confirm→

Save.

The current settings are displayed.

The new settings are displayed.

The temperature compensation for water is active.

219

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.11.13 Resetting the default values of all the differentiation factor
parameters
To reset all the default values of the DF parameters, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→Add. meas. values

DF→

Reset to default

Confirm.

All the DF parameters are reset.

→

Go back to the parent menu.

15.11.14 Use case example of the differentiation factor
If different liquids with different DFs may flow through the pipe, you can identify the liquid flowing throughthe pipe at a given time.
Liquid 1

Liquid 3
Liquid 2DF1,3

Liquid 2

DF range for liquid 3

1

DF range for liquid 2

DF range for liquid 1

0,8

Time
Fig. 61:

Ranges of the DF for different liquids flowing through the pipe

To identify the liquid flowing through the pipe, do the following:→ Connect an analogue output or a digital output configured as a frequency output to a PLC for example.
→ Associate the DF to the used analogue output or digital output. See chapter 18.3.1 Changing theprocess value and the process value range associated to an analogue output or chapter 18.5.3 Configuring a digital output as a frequency output.

→ Make sure you exactly know the ranges of the DF values for the different liquids that may flow throughthe pipe.

→ If necessary, choose the type of temperature compensation for one of the liquids. See chapter 15.11.10.
220→ Configure the ranges in the PLC so that you can clearly identify which liquid is flowing through the pipe.

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.12

Setting the parameters of the acoustic transmission
factor (optional feature)

15.12.1

What is the acoustic transmission factor?

The acoustic transmission factor makes it possible to know the quality of the transmission of sound in theliquid thus the reliability of the measurements.
Indeed, the wave transit time in the liquid and the wave amplitude change depending on the following
criteria:• the type of liquid: aqueous solution, oil solution, emulsion, …
• the presence of gas bubbles,• the presence of solid particles,• the liquid temperature,• the DN of the pipe.
The acoustic transmission factor, given in %, is calculated on the base of the amplitude changes of the
waves. The acoustic transmission factor of water without gas bubbles is equal to 100 % at a water temperature of +23 °C.
The temperature changes of the liquid are not compensated for the measurement of the acoustic transmission factor.
The device measures acoustic transmission factors from 10 % and up.
• If the wave amplitude in a liquid flowing through the pipe is higher than the wave amplitude in water, themeasured acoustic transmission factor will be higher than 100 %.
• If the wave amplitude in a liquid flowing through the pipe is lower than the wave amplitude in water, themeasured acoustic transmission factor will be lower than 100 %.
Gas bubbles or solid particles in the liquid have a similar effect on the transmission acoustic factor. If
the concentration of gas bubbles or solid particles increases in a liquid, the acoustic transmission factor
decreases. So, measuring and monitoring the acoustic transmission factor can be used to detect thepresence of gas bubbles or solid particles in the liquid.

→ Take into account that special process conditions can have an effect on aging of the sensor thus on the
acoustic transmission factor value.

15.12.2 Giving a user defined name to the measured acoustic
transmission factor
The name is used to identify the process value in the user defined views and in all the menus where theprocess value is displayed (for example in the Outputs menu).
By default, the name associated to the measured acoustic transmission factor is Acoustic transmis..
To add a user defined name to the default name, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

221

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter→

Add. meas. values→

Acoustic transmission factor→

Value name→→→characters.

.

Enter the name by selecting and confirming each character. The name can have up to 19

OK
Save the name.
The name is changed.

15.12.3 Activating the damping of the values of the acoustic
transmission factor and choosing a predefined damping level
The damping makes it possible to damp the fluctuations of the measured values of the acoustic transmission factor:• on the display,• on the totalizers,• on the outputs. The damping set for an analog output comes in addition to the damping of the acoustic
transmission factor.
The damping is not applied to the new measured value, if the 2 following conditions are met:
• a Low, Medium or High damping level is active,• and the variation between 2 values that are measured one after the other is higher than 30 %By default, the values of the acoustic transmission factor are damped with the level None.
The Low damping level or no damping at all (None) are suited for applications/processes that need fast
response times.
The Medium damping level or the High damping level are suited if the values of the acoustic transmission
factor change slowly.

→ As an alternative to the 3 predefined damping levels Low, Medium or High, you can set your own
damping parameters. See chapter 15.12.4.

222

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

Chosen damping level is applied

Damping None: all
the fluctuations of themeasured values aretransmitted

Damping Low

Damping Medium

Damping HighNo damping if 2 consecutive measured values vary for ±30 %Fig. 62:

Operation of the available damping levels

Table 29:

Response times (10 %...90 %) of the damping levels for the measurements of the acoustic transmission
factorDamping level
None
Low
MediumHigh
SpecialResponse time
0s
1s
10 s
30 s
User-defined Response time: see chapter 15.12.4

To set a predefined damping level of the acoustic transmission factor, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→Add. meas. values→

Acoustic transmission factor→

Damping→→

The Current settings are displayed

Choose a damping level between Low, Medium and Highdisplayed.

The New settings areSave.

The damping of the values of the acoustic transmission factor is active and a predefined damping levelis chosen.

223

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.12.4 Activating a user-defined damping of the values of theacoustic transmission factor
The damping makes it possible to damp the fluctuations of the measured values of the acoustic transmission factor:• on the display,• on the totalizers,• on the outputs. The damping set for an analog output comes in addition to the damping of the acoustic
transmission factor.
By default, the measured values of the acoustic transmission factor are damped with the level None.
To damp the fluctuations of the measured values, you can:→ either choose 1 of the 3 predefined damping levels: Low, Medium or High. See chapter 15.12.3.
→ Or you can set your own damping parameters with the Special damping.
With the Special damping, you can set 2 parameters:• a user-defined Response time in seconds,• the Jump threshold, i.e. a user-defined percentage. If 2 consecutive measured values vary for ± the percentage, no damping is applied to the second measured value.
To set your own damping parameters of the DF values, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→Add. meas. values→

Acoustic transmission factor→

Damping→Special→Set the value of the Response time→

Choose if the Jump threshold is enabled or disabled→

If the Jump threshold is enabled, set the value.

→

The New settings are displayed

The Current settings are displayed

Save.

The special damping of the values of the acoustic transmission factor is active.

224

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.12.5 Deactivating the damping of the values of the acoustic
transmission
If the damping of the values of the acoustic transmission factor is active, do the following to deactivate it:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→Add. meas. values→

Acoustic transmission factor→

Damping→

Choose None

→

Save.

.

The Current settings are displayed
The New settings are displayed.

The damping of the values of the acoustic transmission factor is inactive.

15.12.6 Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresisof the acoustic transmission factor
To change the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the acoustic transmission factor, do thefollowing:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→Add. meas. values→

Acoustic transmission factor→

Limits→Settings

The Current settings are displayed→

Set the high error limit→

Set the low error limit→

Set the high warning limit→

Set the low warning limit→

Set the hysteresis value→

The New settings are displayed.

Save.
The limit values and the hysteresis value are changed.

225

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.12.7 Activating the monitoring of the acoustic transmission factor
To be informed when the concentration of gas bubbles or solid particles changes in the liquid, monitor the
acoustic transmission factor.
A monitored value can be:• in the normal operating range.
• in the warning range,• in the error range.
You can set 4 limit values: 2 error limits and 2 warning limits.

→ To set the limit values, see chapter 15.12.6 Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the acoustic transmission factor.

Fig. 52 in chapter 15.4.5 explains how the device reacts when the monitored value enters in another range(for example, from the normal range into the warning range). The reaction time depends on the hysteresis
value and if the monitored value increases or decreases.
By default, the monitoring of the acoustic transmission factor and the diagnostics are all disabled.
To activate the monitoring of the acoustic transmission factor, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→Add. meas. values→

Acoustic transmission factor→

Limits→Active

→

Yes.

→

Save.

The monitoring of the acoustic transmission factor is active and the device status will change dependingon the limits that have been set.

→ You can configure the behaviour of an analogue output depending on the status of the device. See
chapter 18.3.3.

→ You can configure a digital output to switch every time a specific event is generated. See chapter 18.5.1
Configuring a digital output as an on/off output.

→ To enable the monitoring, i.e. to be informed when the value of the acoustic transmission factor is

outside the normal range, enable the diagnostics. See chapter 12.10 Activating the diagnostics function.

226

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.12.8 Deactivating the monitoring of the acoustic transmission factor
By default, the acoustic transmission factor values are not monitored.
But if the monitoring of the acoustic transmission factor is active, do the following to deactivate it:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→Add. meas. values→

Acoustic transmission factor→

Limits→Active

→

Save.

No.

The monitoring of the acoustic transmission factor is inactive.

15.12.9 Resetting the default values of the error limits, the warning limits
and the hysteresis of the acoustic transmission factor
The default values of the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the acoustic transmission
factor are the following:• high error value: 195 %,• low error value: 5 %,• high warning value: 190 %,• low warning value: 10 %,• value of the hysteresis: 1 %.
To reset the default values of the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the acoustic transmission factor, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→Add. meas. values→

Acoustic transmission factor→

Limits→Reset to default

Confirm.

The limit values and the hysteresis value are reset.

→

227

Go back to the parent menu.

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.12.10 Resetting the default values of all the acoustic transmission
factor parameters
To reset all the default values of all the acoustic transmission factor parameters, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→Add. meas. value→

Acoustic transmission factor→

Reset to default

Confirm.

All the acoustic transmission factor parameters are reset.

→

Go back to the parent menu.

15.13

Diagnostics: monitoring special events that occur inthe process, on the sensor or on the electronics

You can be informed when a special event occurs in the process, on the sensor or on the electronics of thedevice. You can also choose each event to be a normal operating.
The possible events are listed in Table 30 in Table 31 and in Table 32.

→ To be informed if a special event occurs in the process, on the sensor or on the electronics, configure
the diagnostics as shown in the flowchart in Fig. 63 on page 230.

You can be informed through the colour of the device status indicator and/or through a message and/or
through one or several outputs as shown in the flowcharts in Fig. 64 and in Fig. 65.

228

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

Table 30:

Diagnostics: special events in the process

Special event in the process
Not totally filled

Meaning
The tube is not totally filled.

Liquid out of range

If the parameter Refresh time is set to
Very short, the event Not totally filled
cannot be monitored.
The speed of sound in the liquid is out • DN08, 3/8'', 1/2'': The speedof range.
of sound in the liquid is lower
than 1000 m/s or higher than2000 m/s.

Unstable flow

The flow rate is not stable.

Low flow cut off

The cut-off value of the flow rate has
been used.

Change of liquid

A different liquid flows in the pipe.

Backward flow

Table 31:

The message is active for 10 s on thedisplay.
The liquid flows in the opposite
direction as the one set inchapter 17.4 Setting the direction of
the flow.

• DN15 and above, 3/4'' andabove: The speed of sound in
the liquid is lower than 800 m/s
or higher than 2300 m/s.
The standard deviation of the flowrate measurements is too high.
The cut-off function must be
enabled: see chapter 15.4.9
Enabling the cut-off function of thevolume flow rate.
The speed of sound in the liquid
has changed by more than 3 m/s
in 1 second.
-

Diagnostics: special events occurring on the sensor

Special event occurring on the Meaning
sensorSound cond. out of range
There are gas bubbles or solid
particles in the liquid.
Table 32:

Special condition
Not all the sensors are in contact
with the liquid.

Special condition-

Diagnostics: special events occurring on the electronics

Special event occurring on the Meaningelectronics
Output 1, open loop
There is a connection problem on therelated output.
Output 3, open loop
Output 1, Diag. error
Output 3, Diag. error
Output 2 overload
Output 3 overload

Special condition

The related analogue output mustnot be disabled. See chapter 18.4
Disabling an analogue output
There is a connection problem on the The related analogue output must
related output or a high resistance is
not be disabled. See chapter 18.4
detected in the loop.
Disabling an analogue output.
An overload has been detected on the related digital output.
The output has switched.
229

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter→ Do the settings for a special event (seechapter 15.13.1, 15.13.2, 15.13.3 and 15.13.4).

Is the event associated to the device
status None?

Yes

The event is disabled.

No
Is the event associated to the device
status Normal state1)?

Yes• The event cannot be signalled by ananalogue output.
• If the event is enabled, a message is
generated if the event occurs.

No→ Choose the behaviour of the analogue output(s)for each device status (Failure, Out of specification and Maintenance required).

Is a digital output configured as an on/
off output? See chapter 18.5.1.

No

The event cannot be signalled by adigital output.

Yes
If the event is enabled, it can be signalled by a digital output
configured as an on/off output.
The on/off output can be configured to switch:• depending on this single event.
• and/or, depending on Failure, Out of specification or Maintenance required events.

→ Activate the Diagnostics in General settings –PARAMETER. See chapter 12.10.

Fig. 63:

Flowchart: configuration of the diagnostics

Normal state means that only a message is generated when the event occurs but the event is considered to be part of the normal
operating of the process, or of the electronics, or of the sensor.

1)

230

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

Are the Diagnostics active in General settings – PARAMETER?

No

If the mode of the device status indicator
is set to NAMUR (see chapter 12.4), thedevice status indicator is white.

Yes
If the mode of the device status indicator is set to
NAMUR (see chapter 12.4), the device status indicator is green.
A special event occurs.

Is the event associated to the device
status None?

Yes

The event is disabled and not signalled.

No

Is the event associated to the device
status Normal state?

Yes

The event is only signalled by amessage.

Yes

The on/off output switches dependingon the event.

No
Is the event associated to an on/off
output?
No• The device status indicator is red.
Is the event associated to the device
status Failure?
No
To be continued on the next page...

Fig. 64:

Yes• The analogue outputs react
depending on the behaviour chosen
for Failure events.
• If a digital output is configured as an
on/off output to switch on Failure
events, the on/off output switchesdepending on the event.

Flowchart: operating of the diagnostics when a special event occurs (part 1/2)

231

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter• The device status indicator is yellow.

... continued from the previous page.

Is the event associated to the device
status Out of specification?

• The analogue outputs react
depending on the behaviour chosen
for Out of specification events.
Yes

No• If a digital output is configured as
an on/off output to switch on Outof specification events, the on/off
output switches depending on theevent.

• The device status indicator is blue.

Is the event associated to the device
status Maintenance required?

Yes• The analogue outputs react
depending on the behaviour chosen
for Maintenance required events.
• If a digital output is configured as an
on/off output to switch on Maintenance required events, the on/off
output switches depending on theevent.

Fig. 65:

Flowchart: operating of the diagnostics when a special event occurs (part 2/2)

15.13.1

Enabling the diagnostics for special events in the process

By default, all the diagnostics related to the process are disabled.
To enable the diagnostics of a special event related to the process, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Diag events→

Process→

Choose the special event→

Choose whether the information related to the special event is a Failure, an Out of specification, aMaintenance required or a Normal state

→

Save.
The diagnostics on the special event is enabled.

232→ To be informed that an event occurs, activate all the diagnostics on the device. See chapter 12.10.

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.13.2 Disabling the diagnostics on a special event related to theprocess
By default, all the diagnostics related to the process are disabled.
If a special event related to the process is enabled, do the following to disable the event:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Diag events→

Process→

Choose the special event→

Choose None

→

Save.
The diagnostics on the special event is disabled.

15.13.3 Disabling the diagnostics on a special event occurring on theelectronics
By default, all the diagnostics related to special events occurring on the electronics are disabled.
If a special event occurring on the electronics is enabled, do the following to disable the event:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Diag events→

Electronic→

Choose the special event→

Choose None

→

Save.
The diagnostics on the special event is disabled.

233

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.13.4 Enabling the diagnostics for special events occurring on theelectronics
By default, all the diagnostics related to the electronics are disabled.
To enable the diagnostics related to the electronics, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Diag events→

Electronic→

Choose the event→

Choose whether the information related to the electronics event is a Failure, an Out of specification,a Maintenance required or a Normal state

→

Save.
The diagnostics on the electronics event is enabled.

→ To be informed that an event occurs, activate all the diagnostics on the device. See chapter 12.10.
15.13.5 Disabling the diagnostics on a special event occurring on thesensorBy default, all the diagnostics related to special events occurring on the sensor are disabled.
If a special event occurring on the sensor is enabled, do the following to disable the event:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Diag events→

Sensor→Choose the special event→

Choose None

→

Save.
The diagnostics on the special event is disabled.

234

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.13.6 Enabling the diagnostics for special events occurring on thesensorBy default, all the diagnostics related to the sensor are disabled.
To enable the diagnostics related to the sensor, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Diag events→

Sensor→Choose the event→

Choose whether the information related to the sensor event is a Failure, an Out of specification, aMaintenance required or a Normal state

→

Save.
The diagnostics on the sensor event is enabled.

→ To be informed that an event occurs, activate all the diagnostics on the device. See chapter 12.10.

235

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.14

Getting as accurate measurements of the volume
flow rate, the mass flow rate or the liquid velocity as
possible

To get as accurate measurements of the volume flow rate, the mass flow rate or the liquid velocity as possible, you can activate the compensation of the kinematic viscosity (in mm2/s).
The following kinematic viscosity compensations are available:• for water or a liquid whose viscosity u (in mm2/s) varies with the temperature T (in °C) like the viscosity ofwater and in the same range as water. Default setting. The related equation is:

𝑣𝑣 =

1

0,555029 + 0,020217𝑇𝑇 + 9,9. 10−5 𝑇𝑇 2

→ To activate the viscosity compensation for water, see chapter 15.14.1.
• for a liquid with a constant viscosity. To be chosen if the liquid temperature is constant and thus the viscosity of the liquid is constant. The related equation is:

𝑣𝑣 = 𝑎𝑎→ To activate the viscosity compensation for a liquid whose viscosity is constant, see chapter 15.14.2.
• for a liquid with a linear compensation curve. To be chosen if the viscosity of the liquid varies in a linear
way depending on the liquid temperature. The related equation is:
𝑣𝑣 = 𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏

→ To activate the viscosity compensation for a liquid with a linear viscosity compensation curve, seechapter 15.14.3.

• for a liquid with a quadratic compensation curve. To be chosen if the viscosity of the liquid varies in aquadratic way depending on the liquid temperature. The related equation is:
𝑣𝑣 = 𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 2 → To activate the viscosity compensation for a liquid with a quadratic viscosity compensation curve, seechapter 15.14.4.

• for a liquid with an inverse quadratic compensation curve. To be chosen if the viscosity of the liquid varies
in an inverse quadratic way depending on the liquid temperature, but the viscosity range is different fromthe one of water. The related equation is:
𝑣𝑣 =

1

𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 2→ To activate the viscosity compensation for a liquid with an inverse quadratic viscosity compensation curve,
see chapter 15.14.5.

236

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.14.1

Activating the viscosity compensation for water-like liquids

To activate the viscosity compensation of water-like liquids, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Viscosity compensation→

Settings

The current settings are displayed.

→

Confirm

Water→

ConfirmSave.

The viscosity compensation for a water-like liquid is active.

15.14.2 Activating the compensation for a liquid with a constantviscosity
The kinematic viscosity of a liquid can be constant either because the temperature of the liquid is constantor because the temperature changes have a very low effect on the viscosity.
To activate the compensation for a liquid with a constant viscosity, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Viscosity compensation→

Settings→

Confirm.

→

Constant→

Confirm.

Set the value of the liquid viscosity in the displayed units (mm2/s). You must enter a positive value. For example, to set the kinematic viscosity value for oil at 20 °C, i.e. 89 mm2/s, enter
8.900000E+01.

→→

The current settings are displayed.

The New settings are displayed.
Save.
The compensation for a liquid with a constant viscosity is active.

237

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.14.3 Activating the compensation for a liquid with a linear viscosity
compensation curve
To activate the compensation for a liquid with a viscosity that changes in a linear way with the liquid temperature, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Viscosity compensation→

Settings→

Confirm.

→

Linear→Confirm.

→→→

The current settings are displayed.

Set the value of the constant a of the linear curve, in the displayed units (mm2/s), and in the scientific notation. For example, to set the value 0.03724, enter 3.724000E-02 or, to set the value 372.4,
enter 3.724000E+02.
Confirm.
Set the value of the constant b of the linear curve, in the displayed units, and in the scientificnotation.

→

Confirm.

→

Save.
The compensation for a liquid with a linear compensation curve is active.

If the calculated result of the equation is negative or equal to 0 (for example if the liquid temperature is notin the range covered by the equation, or if a wrong constant value has been entered), the compensatedvolume flow is incorrect and the error message Viscosity compensation failed is displayed. If the message
is displayed, do the following:→ Make sure the liquid temperature is in the range covered by the equation.
→ Make sure you have entered correct a constant value.

238

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.14.4 Activating the compensation for a liquid with a quadratic
viscosity compensation curve
To activate the compensation for a liquid with a quadratic viscosity compensation curve, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Viscosity compensation→

Settings→

Confirm.

→

Quadratic→

Confirm.

→

→
→
→
→

The current settings are displayed.

Set the value of constant a of the quadratic curve, in the displayed units (mm2/s), and in the scientific notation. For example, to set the value 0.03724, enter 3.724000E-02 or, to set the value 372.4,
enter 3.724000E+02.
Confirm.
Set the value of constant b of the quadratic curve, in the displayed units, and in the scientificnotation.
Confirm.
Set the value of constant c of the quadratic curve, in the displayed units, and in the scientificnotation.

→

Confirm.

→

Save.
The compensation for a liquid with a quadratic compensation curve is active.

If the calculated result of the equation is negative or equal to 0 (for example if the liquid temperature is notin the range covered by the equation, or if wrong constant values have been entered), the compensatedvolume flow is incorrect and the error message Viscosity compensation failed is displayed. If the message
is displayed, do the following:→ Make sure the liquid temperature is in the range covered by the equation.
→ Make sure you have entered correct constant values.

239

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.14.5 Activating the compensation for a liquid with an inverse
quadratic viscosity compensation curve
To activate the compensation for a liquid with an inverse quadratic compensation curve, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Viscosity compensation→

Settings→

Confirm.

→

Inverse quadratic→

Confirm.

→

→
→
→
→

The current settings are displayed.

Set the value of constant a of the quadratic curve, in the displayed units (mm2/s), and in the scientific notation. For example, to set the value 0.03724, enter 3.724000E-02 or, to set the value 372.4,
enter 3.724000E+02.
Confirm.
Set the value of constant b of the quadratic curve, in the displayed units, and in the scientificnotation.
Confirm.
Set the value of constant c of the quadratic curve, in the displayed units, and in the scientificnotation.

→

Confirm.

→

Save.
The compensation for a liquid with an inverse quadratic compensation curve is active.

If the calculated result of the equation is negative or equal to 0 (for example if the liquid temperature is not in
the range covered by the equation, or if wrong constant values have been entered), the compensated volume
flow is incorrect and the error message Viscosity compensation failed is displayed. If the message is displayed, do the following:→ Make sure the liquid temperature is in the range covered by the equation.
→ Make sure you have entered correct constant values.

240

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.14.6 Resetting the default values of the viscosity compensation
parameters
To reset the default values of the viscosity compensation parameters, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Viscosity compensation→

Reset to default→

Confirm.
The viscosity compensation parameters are reset.

→

Go back to the parent menu.

241englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Parameter

15.15

Setting the refresh time

15.15.1

Use case of the refresh time

The refresh time is the minimum time needed to update a measurement value. The refresh time has noeffect on the damping of the measured values.
The refresh time of the temperature values is a constant but the refresh time of the other measurement
values can be adapted to the process:• A very short refresh time is needed if the process requires quick volume flow rate measurement updates,for example for very short dosings.
• A long refresh time is sufficient if for example there are slow flow rate changes in the process.

15.15.2 Changing the refresh time
3 refresh time modes are available:
Refresh time mode

Volume flow rate

Density

Mass flow rate

Very short~ 25 ms~1 s~ 25 ms

Short~ 40 ms~1 s~ 40 msLong~ 75 ms~0.5 s~ 75 ms

If the very short refresh time is set:
• The diagnostics event Not totally filled is not available.
• The measurement deviation for a flow rate between 10 % of the full scale and the full scale is ±0.6 %.
• The repeatability for a flow rate between 10 % of the full scale and the full scale is ±0.3 %.
If a digital output is configured as a pulse output, the following durations must be added to the lastreceived pulse:• 50 ms, if the refresh time is set to Very short,• 80 ms, if the refresh time is set to Short,• 140 ms, if the refresh time is set to Long.
To change the refresh time, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.

242→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Refresh time→

Choose the refresh time.

→

Save.

.

The refresh time is changed.

englishType 8098 FLOWave L﻿Menu SAW sensor – DIAGNOSTICS
16

SAW SENSOR – DIAGNOSTICS.........................................................................................................244
16.1 Reading out the generated events related to the device........................................................244
16.2 Reading out the flow direction that has been set...................................................................244
16.3 Reading out the temperatures of the electronic boards and of the liquid.............................244
16.4 Reading out the refresh time that has been set......................................................................245
16.5 Reading out the operating hours of the device.......................................................................245
16.6 Reading out the operating hours of the measurement board.................................................246
16.7 Reading out the diagnostics related to the output values......................................................246
16.8 Reading out the diagnostics events that occurred in the process.........................................246
16.9 Reading out the diagnostics events that occurred on the electronics..................................247
16.10 Reading out the diagnostics events that occurred on the sensor.........................................247
16.11 Reading out the diagnostic events related to the monitored limits........................................248
16.12 Reading out if a process value is in the monitored range.......................................................248

243

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Diagnostics

16

SAW SENSOR – DIAGNOSTICS

16.1

Reading out the generated events related to thedeviceTo read out the generated events related to the monitoring of the process value limits and to the diagnostics
events, and to read out the possible associated behaviour of the device, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→Device→Status

→Go back to the parent menu.

16.2

Reading out the flow direction that has been set

To read out the flow direction that has been set in chapter 17.4 Setting the direction of the flow, do thefollowing:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→Device→Flow direction→

Go back to the parent menu.

16.3

Reading out the temperatures of the electronicboards and of the liquid

To read out the measured temperatures of the electronic boards and of the liquid, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor

244

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Diagnostics→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→Device→Temperatures→

Go back to the parent menu.

16.4

Reading out the refresh time that has been set

To read out the refresh time that has been set in chapter 15.15 Setting the refresh time, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→Device→Refresh time→

Go back to the parent menu.

16.5

Reading out the operating hours of the device

To read out the operating hours of the device, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→Device→Operating hours→

Go back to the parent menu.

245

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Diagnostics

16.6

Reading out the operating hours of the measurementboard

To read out the operating hours of the measurement board, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→Device→Operating hours (measurement board)→

Go back to the parent menu.

16.7

Reading out the diagnostics related to the output
valuesThe outputs values give the values of the process values at a certain time. See chapter 18. To read out
diagnostics related to the output values, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→

Output value→

Go back to the parent menu.

16.8

Reading out the diagnostics events that occurred in
the process

To read out the diagnostics events that occurred in the process, and to read out the possible associatedbehaviour of the device, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
246

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Diagnostics→

Diag. events→

Process→

Status

→Go back to the parent menu.

16.9

Reading out the diagnostics events that occurred on
the electronics

To read out the diagnostics events that occurred on the electronics, and to read out the possible associatedbehaviour of the device, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→

Diag. events→

Electronic→

Status

→Go back to the parent menu.

16.10

Reading out the diagnostics events that occurred on
the sensor

To read out the status of the diagnostics events that occurred on the sensor, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→

Diag. events→

Sensor→Status

→Go back to the parent menu.

247

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Diagnostics

16.11

Reading out the diagnostic events related to themonitored limits

To read out the diagnostics related to the monitored limits, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→

Limits→Status

→Go back to the parent menu.

16.12

Reading out if a process value is in the monitored
range

This menu point allows you to read out if a process-value is inside or outside its monitored limits. The monitoring of the process-value limits must be active. Refer to chapter 15.4.5, 15.6.5 and 15.7.5.
To read out if a process-value is inside or outside its monitored limits do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→

Limits→ Choose the process value→

Status

→Go back to the parent menu.

248

englishType 8098 FLOWave L﻿Menu SAW sensor – MAINTENANCE
17

SAW SENSOR – MAINTENANCE........................................................................................................25117.1 User levels of the editable menu items ...................................................................................25117.2 Default settings.........................................................................................................................25117.3 Reading out some device information.....................................................................................251
17.3.1

Reading out the ordering codes of the device, the transmitter board andthe measurement board...........................................................................................251

17.3.2

Reading out the serial numbers of the device, the transmitter board andthe measurement board...........................................................................................252

17.3.3

Reading out the hardware and software versions of the transmitter board
and of the measurement board................................................................................252

17.3.4

Reading out the characteristics of the measurement tube....................................252

17.3.5Checking the correct operation of the sensor ........................................................253

17.3.6

Reading out the calibration date at the manufacturer ...........................................254

17.3.7

Reading out the liquid type and the liquid temperature during calibration
at the manufacturer .................................................................................................255

17.3.8

Reading out the raw measured value of the volume flow rate ..............................255

17.4 Setting the direction of the flow...............................................................................................25617.5 Calibrating the offset value of the flow zero point...................................................................25617.6 Setting the offset value of the flow zero point.........................................................................257
17.7 Setting the K factor...................................................................................................................258
17.8 Calibrating the K factor by using a teach-in procedure..........................................................258
17.8.1

Calibrating the K factor by using a teach-in procedure depending on thevolume flow rate.......................................................................................................259

17.8.2

Calibrating the K factor by using a teach-in procedure depending on a
known volume ..........................................................................................................260

17.8.3

Calibrating the K factor by using a teach-in procedure depending on themass flow rate...........................................................................................................261

17.8.4

Calibrating the K factor by using a teach-in procedure depending on a
known mass..............................................................................................................262

17.9 Resetting the flow rate calibration data to its default values..................................................26417.10 Setting the offset value of the liquid temperature...................................................................26417.11 Calibrating the offset value of the liquid temperature.............................................................26517.12 Resetting the offset of the liquid temperature to its default value.........................................266
17.13 Resetting all the calibration data to its default values (standard measurement values).......266
17.14 Setting the offset value of the differentiation factor................................................................267

english249

Type 8098 FLOWave L﻿

17.15 Calibrating the offset value of the differentiation factor..........................................................267
17.16 Setting the slope value of the differentiation factor................................................................268
17.17 Setting the offset value of the liquid density...........................................................................269
17.18 Setting the slope value of the liquid density............................................................................269
17.19 Calibrating the liquid density by using a teach-in procedure depending on density............270
17.20 Setting the offset value of the acoustic transmission factor..................................................271
17.21 Calibrating the offset value of the acoustic transmission factor............................................271
17.22 Setting the slope value of the acoustic transmission factor...................................................273
17.23 Resetting all the calibration data to its default values (additional measurement values).....274
17.24 Checking the correct behaviour of the device........................................................................275
17.24.1

Choosing the process values to be simulated........................................................275

17.24.2

Checking the behaviour of the device by simulating an event...............................276

17.24.3

Stopping the simulation of process values and events..........................................277

250

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Maintenance17

SAW SENSOR – MAINTENANCE

17.1

User levels of the editable menu items

Menu item of the SAW sensor – Maintenance menu
Device information
Flow direction
Calibration
Device verification
Simulation

17.2

Minimum user level
Basic user
Installer
Installer
Installer
Installer

Default settings

You can find the default settings of the device in the CANopen supplement for the Type 8098 FLOWave L atcountry.burkert.com.

→ Before making any change in the settings, use the Bürkert Communicator software to print a pdf file withall the default settings of the device.

17.3

Reading out some device information

17.3.1

Reading out the ordering codes of the device, the transmitterboard and the measurement board

To read out the ordering codes of the device, the transmitter board and the measurement board, do thefollowing:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→Device information→

ID numbers→

Go back to the parent menu.

251

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Maintenance17.3.2

Reading out the serial numbers of the device, the transmitterboard and the measurement board

To read out the serial numbers of the device, the transmitter board and the measurement board, do thefollowing:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→Device information→

Serial numbers→

Go back to the parent menu.

17.3.3

Reading out the hardware and software versions of thetransmitter board and of the measurement board

To read out the hardware and software versions of the transmitter board and of the measurement board, do
the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→Device information→

Versions→

Go back to the parent menu.

17.3.4

Reading out the characteristics of the measurement tube

To read out the characteristics of the measurement tube, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→Device information→

Pipe characteristics→

Go back to the parent menu.

252

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Maintenance17.3.5Checking the correct operation of the sensor

You can check the correct operation of the sensor by comparing the current measured values of someparameters with their reference values. The reference values depend on the conditions of your process:• If you measure water at 23 °C ±5 °C (73.4 °F ±9 °F) that is free of gas bubbles and free of solids, thenthe conditions of your process are similar to the calibration conditions of the device at the manufacturer.
The reference values are those after the device calibration and they can be read in the menu Device
verification.
• If you do not measure water at 23 °C ±5 °C (73.4 °F ±9 °F), then the reference values are in the report thatyou have generated with the Bürkert Communicator software at the following moments:− after the first commissioning of the device. Refer to chapter 9.
− after the last maintenance operation
To check the correct operation of the sensor, do the following:
1. If you do not measure water at 23 °C ±5 °C (73.4 °F ±9 °F), then get the report with the reference values.
2. Access the menu Device verification:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→Device verification.

The values of the parameters are displayed.
3. Calculate the deviation for each parameter that is listed in Table 33 or in Table 34. Use the following
formula:| current measured value – reference value | / reference value = deviation• If you measure water at 23 °C ±5 °C (73.4 °F ±9 °F) that is free of gas bubbles and free of solids, then use
the values that are displayed in the parameters from columns A and B of Table 33.
Table 33:

Parameter values to compare if the measured liquid is water at 23 °C ±5 °C (73.4 °F ±9 °F)

Menu itemA
Current measured value of theparameter

DF
Acoustic transmission factor

DF
Acoustic transmission factor

Amplitudes

SAW signal
Signal WG1 13
A0
WG1

Times of flight

B
Reference value of theparameter after calibration at the
manufacturer
DF fact. cal.
Acoustic transmission factor
fact. cal.
SAW signal fact. calibration
Signal WG1 13 fact. calibration
A0 fact. calibration
WG1 fact. calibration
253

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Maintenance• If you do not measure water at 23 °C ±5 °C (73.4 °F ±9 °F), then use the values of the same parameter inthe menu Device verification on the display and in the report. Refer to Table 34.
Table 34:

Parameter values to compare if the measured liquid is not water at 23 °C ±5 °C (73.4 °F ±9 °F)

Menu item

Current measured value of the Parameter in the menu
Device verification on the display and in the reportDF
Acoustic transmission factor
SAW signal
Signal WGx yz
A0
WGx

DF
Acoustic transmission factor
Amplitudes
Times of flight
4. Evaluate the deviations of all parameters:• If the deviations of all parameters are less than the values that are given in Table 35, then the sensor
operates correctly.
• If the deviation of at least one parameter exceeds the value that is given in Table 35, then the sensor canpossibly be defect. Contact Bürkert.
Table 35:

Deviation values for a defect sensor

Parameters
DF
Acoustic transmission factor

Deviation> 10 %> 25 %

Amplitudes> 25 %> 25 %> 10 %> 10 %

SAW signal
Signal WGx yz
A0
WGx

Times of flight

17.3.6

Reading out the calibration date at the manufacturer

To read out the calibration date of the device at the manufacturer, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→Device verification→

Factory calibration→

Go back to the parent menu.

254englishDate

Type 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Maintenance17.3.7

Reading out the liquid type and the liquid temperature duringcalibration at the manufacturer

To read out the type of liquid and the temperature of the liquid used for the calibration of the device at the
manufacturer, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→Device verification→

Factory calibration

Medium→Factory calibration

Medium temperature→

Go back to the parent menu.

17.3.8

Reading out the raw measured value of the volume flow rate

The raw value of the volume flow rate is a value that is not damped and to which the active cut-off is notapplied. To read out the raw value of the volume flow rate, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→Device verification→

Volume flow→

Go back to the parent menu.

Undamped without cut-off

255

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Maintenance

17.4

Setting the direction of the flow

By default, if the flow direction is opposite the arrow located on the front of the device, the displayed flowrate values are negative.
If you want that the device displays positive flow rate values, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→→

Flow direction
Choose Standard if the arrow located on the front of the device shows the flow direction, or choose
Reverse if the flow direction is opposite the arrow located on the front of the device.

→

Save.
The flow direction is set and the displayed flow rate values are positive.

17.5

Calibrating the offset value of the flow zero point

Adjust this parameter:• before carrying out a teach-in procedure of the K factor.
• after maintenance work.
• if the measured flow rate is not zero whereas the flow has been stopped.
During the calibration:• The device status indicator is orange, if the operating mode of the device status indicator is set
to NAMUR (ex-works setting, see chapter 12.4 Changing the operating mode of the device statusindicator or switching off the device status indicator).
• The NAMUR mode "function check" is active. The outputs react depending on your settings.
Instead of calibrating the offset value of the flow zero point, you can directly set it. See chapter 17.6 Setting
the offset value of the flow zero point.
To calibrate the flow zero point, do the following:→ Charge the pipe. To avoid bubbles and air in the pipe, make sure it is full of liquid.
→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
256→

Calibration

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Maintenance→Stand. meas. values→

Flow rate→

Offset→Zero flow offset by teach-in→ Stop the flow and wait until it is completely still.

After 30 s, the New settings are displayed.

→

The Current settings are displayed.
Start the calibration of the offset value.

Save.
The offset value of the flow zero point is calibrated.

If the calibration fails, a message is displayed. Refer to chapter 24.10 Messages due to calibration or
simulation.

→

Acknowledge the message to go back to the parent menu.

17.6

Setting the offset value of the flow zero point

Instead of setting the offset value of the flow zero point, you can calibrate it. See chapter 17.5 Calibrating
the offset value of the flow zero point.
To enter the offset value of the flow zero point, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Calibration→

Stand. meas. values→

Flow rate→

Offset→Enter value→→

Set the value of the offset. Take into account the direction of the flow as set in chapter 17.4
Setting the direction of the flow
Save.
The offset value of the flow zero point is set.
257

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Maintenance

17.7

Setting the K factor

By default, the value of the K factor is 1.0000.
The K factor can be adjusted, if the measured flow rate values differ from the real values.
Instead of setting the K factor, you can calibrate it by using a teach-in procedure. See chapter 17.8 Calibrating the K factor by using a teach-in procedure.
To enter the value of the K factor, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Calibration→

Stand. meas. values→

Flow rate→

K factor→

Enter value→

Set the value of the K factor.

→

Save.
The new K factor value is used.

17.8

Calibrating the K factor by using a teach-inprocedure

Before any teach-in procedure, calibrate or set the offset value flow zero point of the device. See
chapter 17.5 Calibrating the offset value of the flow zero point or 17.6 Setting the offset value of theflow zero point.
By default, the value of the K factor is 1.0000.
The K factor should be adjusted, if the flow rate values that are measured by the device differ from thevalues that are measured by a reference instrument.
The K factor can be:• manually adjusted. See chapter 17.7 Setting the K factor.
• automatically calibrated by using a teach-in procedure depending on the volume flow rate. See chapter
17.8.1.
• automatically calibrated by using a teach-in procedure depending on a known volume. See chapter 17.8.2.
• automatically calibrated by using a teach-in procedure depending on the mass flow rate. See chapter 17.8.3.
258• automatically calibrated by using a teach-in procedure depending on a known mass. See chapter 17.8.4.

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Maintenance17.8.1

Calibrating the K factor by using a teach-in procedure
depending on the volume flow rate

→ Make sure the teach-in conditions are similar to those of the process.
→ In order that the calibration result is correct, make sure the following conditions are met during theteach-in procedure:• the liquid temperature is stable,• the flow rate is stable,• the liquid that flows through the device does not change.
To calibrate the K factor by using a teach-in procedure depending on the flow rate, do the following:→ Make sure a reference flowmeter is installed in the same pipe as the FLOWave.
→ Charge the pipe. The flow rate must be at least 5 % of the full scale.
→ Wait for the flow rate to be stable.
→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Calibration→

Stand. meas. values→

Flow rate→

Teach-in by volume flow→

Start the teach-in procedure.

K factor
The current K factor is displayed.

If the cut-off function is enabled, it is automatically deactivated.

→ Wait for about 30 s: the device is averaging the flow rate.
→

After 30 s, enter the average value of the flow rate that has been measured by the reference
flowmeter.

→

The New settings are displayed.

→

Save.
The new K factor is used.
If the cut-off function has been automatically deactivated, it is enabled again.

If the calibration fails, a message is displayed. Refer to chapter 24.10 Messages due to calibration or simulation.

→

Acknowledge the message to go back to the parent menu.

259

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Maintenance17.8.2

Calibrating the K factor by using a teach-in procedure
depending on a known volume→ Make sure the teach-in conditions are similar to those of the process.
To calibrate the K factor by using a teach-in procedure depending on a known volume, do the following:→ Prepare a tank which capacity you know. To make sure to get an accurate K factor, prepare the recommended volume of liquid given in Table 36 or in Table 37.

Table 36:

Recommended volume for a teach-in procedure depending on a known volume

Diameter of the measurement tube

Minimum flow rate at 4 m/s

3/8"

11 l/min.

Recommended volume, in litres,to get an accurate K factor
19

1/2"

17 l/min.

28

DN8

20 l/min.

33

Table 37:

Recommended volume for a teach-in procedure depending on a known volume

Diameter of the measurement tube

Minimum flow rate at 1 m/s

3/4"

12 l/min.

Recommended volume, in litres,to get an accurate K factor
19

1"

23 l/min.

38

1 1/2"

57 l/min.

95

2"

106 l/min.

177

2 1/2"

171 l/min.

285

3"

250 l/min.

417

DN15

15 l/min.

26

DN25

42 l/min.

69

DN40

92 l/min.

154

DN50

149 l/min.

249

DN65

245 l/min.

408

DN80

355 l/min.

472→ Stop the flow.
→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Calibration→

Stand. meas. values→

Flow rate260

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Maintenance→K factor→

Teach-in by volume→

Start the teach-in procedure.

The current K factor is displayed.

If the cut-off function is enabled, it is automatically deactivated.

→ Let the liquid flow through the device into the tank. When the desired volume is reached→→Enter the volume that has flown in the tank.

The New settings are displayed.

Save.
The new K factor is used.
If the cut-off function has been automatically deactivated, it is enabled again.

If the calibration fails, a message is displayed. Refer to chapter 24.10 Messages due to calibration or
simulation.

→

Acknowledge the message to go back to the parent menu.

17.8.3

Calibrating the K factor by using a teach-in procedure
depending on the mass flow rate

→ Make sure the teach-in conditions are similar to those of the process.
→ In order that the calibration result is correct, make sure the following conditions are met during theteach-in procedure:• the liquid temperature is stable,• the mass flow rate is stable,• the liquid that flows through the device does not change.
To calibrate the K factor by using a teach-in procedure depending on the mass flow rate, do the following:→ Make sure a reference flowmeter is installed in the same pipe as the FLOWave.
→ Charge the pipe. The mass flow rate must be at least 5 % of the full scale.
→ Wait for the mass flow rate to be stable.
→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Calibration→

Stand. meas. values
261

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Maintenance→

Flow rate→

Teach-in by mass flow rate→

Start the teach-in procedure.

K factor
The current K factor is displayed.

If the cut-off function is enabled, it is automatically deactivated.

→ Wait for about 30 s: the device is averaging the mass flow rate.
→

After 30 s, enter the average value of the mass flow rate that has been measured by the reference
flowmeter.

→

The New settings are displayed.

→

Save.
The new K factor is used.
If the cut-off function has been automatically deactivated, it is enabled again.

If the calibration fails, a message is displayed. Refer to chapter 24.10 Messages due to calibration or
simulation.

→

Acknowledge the message to go back to the parent menu.

17.8.4

Calibrating the K factor by using a teach-in procedure
depending on a known mass

→ Make sure the teach-in conditions are similar to those of the process.
To calibrate the K factor by using a teach-in procedure depending on a known mass, do the following:→ Prepare a tank which capacity you know. To make sure to get an accurate K factor, prepare the recommended mass of liquid given in Table 38 or in Table 39.

Table 38:

Recommended mass for a teach-in procedure depending on a known mass

Diameter of the measurement tube

Minimum flow rate at 4 m/s

3/8"

11 l/min.

Recommended mass, in kg, to getan accurate K factor
19 × liquid density

1/2"

17 l/min.

28 × liquid density

DN8

20 l/min.

33 × liquid density

Table 39:

Recommended mass for a teach-in procedure depending on a known mass

Diameter of the measurement tube

Minimum flow rate at 1 m/s

3/4"

12 l/min.

Recommended mass, in kg, to getan accurate K factor
19 × liquid density

1"

23 l/min.

38 × liquid density

1 1/2"

57 l/min.

95 × liquid density

2"

106 l/min.

177 × liquid density

2 1/2"

171 l/min.

285 × liquid density

3"

250 l/min.

417 × liquid density262

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – MaintenanceDiameter of the measurement tube

Minimum flow rate at 1 m/s

DN15

15 l/min.

Recommended mass, in kg, to getan accurate K factor
26 × liquid density

DN25

42 l/min.

69 × liquid density

DN40

92 l/min.

154 × liquid density

DN50

149 l/min.

249 × liquid density

DN65

245 l/min.

408 × liquid density

DN80

355 l/min.

472 × liquid density→ Stop the flow.
→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Calibration→

Stand. meas. values→

Flow rate→

K factor→

Teach-in by mass→

Start the teach-in procedure.

The current K factor is displayed.

If the cut-off function is enabled, it is automatically deactivated.

→ Let the liquid flow through the device into the tank. When the desired mass is reached→→Enter the mass that has flown in the tank.

The New settings are displayed.

Save.
The new K factor is used.
If the cut-off function has been automatically deactivated, it is enabled again.

If the calibration fails, a message is displayed. Refer to chapter 24.10 Messages due to calibration or
simulation.

→

Acknowledge the message to go back to the parent menu.

263

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Maintenance

17.9

Resetting the flow rate calibration data to its default
valuesTo reset all the flow rate calibration data to its default values, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Calibration→

Stand. meas. values→

Flow rate→

Reset to default

Confirm.

All the flow rate calibration data is reset to their default values.

→

Go back to the parent menu.

17.10

Setting the offset value of the liquid temperature

Instead of setting the offset value of the liquid temperature, you can calibrate it. See chapter 17.11 Calibrating the offset value of the liquid temperature.
To enter an offset value for the liquid temperature, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Calibration→

Stand. meas. values→

Temperature→

Offset→→Enter value

Set the value of the offset.
Save.
The offset value of the liquid temperature is set.

264

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Maintenance

17.11

Calibrating the offset value of the liquid temperature

Instead of calibrating the offset value of the liquid temperature, you can directly enter it. See chapter 17.10
Setting the offset value of the liquid temperature.
To calibrate the offset value of the liquid temperature, do the following:→ Make sure a reference temperature sensor is installed in the same pipe as the FLOWave and as near as
possible to the FLOWave.

→ Charge the pipe.
→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Calibration→

Stand. meas. values→

Temperature→

Offset→ Make sure the calibration conditions (liquid temperature and ambient temperature) are the same as forthe usual measuring conditions.

→ Make sure the temperature of the liquid is constant and stable during the calibration procedure.
→Temper. cal. by ref.

→Start the calibration procedure.

→

The current offset is displayed.

After 30 s, enter the average value of the liquid temperature that has been measured by the reference temperature sensor.

→

The New settings are displayed.

→

Save.
The new temperature offset is used.

If the calibration fails, a message is displayed. Refer to chapter 24.10 Messages due to calibration or simulation. The calibration can fail due to the following causes:• the calculated offset value is higher than ±10 °C.
• the integrated temperature sensor is defective.

→

Acknowledge the message to go back to the parent menu.

265

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Maintenance

17.12

Resetting the offset of the liquid temperature to its
default value

To reset the offset of the liquid temperature to its default value, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Calibration→

Stand. meas. values→

Temperature→

Reset to default

Confirm.

The temperature offset is reset to its default value.

→

Go back to the parent menu.

17.13

Resetting all the calibration data to its default values(standard measurement values)

The calibration data that can be reset is:• the K factor,• the offset value of the flow zero point,• the offset value of the liquid temperature.
To reset all the calibration data to its default values, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Calibration→

Stand. meas. values→

Reset to default→

Confirm.
All the calibration data is reset to their default values.

266→

Go back to the parent menu.

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Maintenance

17.14

Setting the offset value of the differentiation factor

Instead of setting the offset value of the DF, you can calibrate it. See chapter 17.15.
To enter an offset value for the DF, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Calibration→

Add. meas. values

→

DF

→

Offset→Enter value→→

Set the value of the offset.
Save.
The offset value of the DF is set.

17.15

Calibrating the offset value of the differentiation factor→ Make sure the teach-in conditions are similar to those of the process.
→ To get a correct calibration result, make sure that the following conditions are met during the teach-inprocedure:• The liquid temperature is stable.
• The liquid that flows through the device does not change. Or the liquid is still and the pipe is full and freeof bubbles.
During the calibration:• The device status indicator is orange, if the operating mode of the device status indicator is set
to NAMUR (ex-works setting, see chapter 12.4 Changing the operating mode of the device statusindicator or switching off the device status indicator).
• The NAMUR mode "function check" is active. The outputs react depending on your settings.
Instead of calibrating the offset value of the DF, you can directly set it. See chapter 17.14.
To calibrate the offset value of the DF, do the following:→ Make sure the liquid in the pipe is the liquid to be measured.
→ Charge the pipe. To avoid bubbles and air in the pipe, make sure it is full of liquid.
267

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Maintenance→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Calibration→

Add. meas. values

→

DF

→

Offset→Teach-in by reference→

Start the calibration of the offset value.

→→

The Current settings are displayed.

After 30 s, enter the DF of the reference liquid.
The New settings are displayed.
Save.
The offset value of the DF is calibrated.

If the calibration fails, a message is displayed. Refer to chapter 24.10 Messages due to calibration or
simulation.

→

Acknowledge the message to go back to the parent menu.

17.16

Setting the slope value of the differentiation factor

To enter a slope value for the DF, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.

268→

Calibration→

Add. meas. values

→

DF

→

Slope

→

Enter value

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Maintenance→→Set the slope value.
Save.
The slope value of the DF is set.

17.17

Setting the offset value of the liquid density

Instead of setting the offset value of the liquid density, you can calibrate it. See chapter 17.19.
To enter an offset value for the liquid density, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Calibration→

Stand. meas. values→

Density→

Offset→Enter value→→

Set the value of the offset.
Save.
The offset value of the liquid density is set.

17.18

Setting the slope value of the liquid density

To enter a slope value for the liquid density, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Calibration→

Stand. meas. values→

Density269

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Maintenance

→

Slope

→

Enter value→→

Set the slope value.
Save.
The slope value of the liquid density is set.

17.19

Calibrating the liquid density by using a teach-inprocedure depending on density

To calibrate the liquid density, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Calibration→

Stand. meas. values→

Density→

Teach-in by density→

Start the teach-in procedure.

→→

The current da coefficient is displayed.

When asked, enter the density of the liquid.
Save.
The new da coefficient is now used.

→

Acknowledge the message to go back to the parent menu.

270

englishThe New settings are displayed.

Type 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Maintenance

17.20

Setting the offset value of the acoustic transmission
factorInstead of setting the offset value of the acoustic transmission factor, you can calibrate it. See
chapter 17.21.
To enter an offset value for the acoustic transmission factor, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Calibration→

Add. meas. values→

Acoustic transmission factor→

Offset→Enter value→→

Set the value of the offset.
Save.
The offset value of the acoustic transmission factor is set.

17.21

Calibrating the offset value of the acoustic
transmission factor→ Make sure the teach-in conditions are similar to those of the process.
→ In order that the calibration result is correct, make sure the following conditions are met during theteach-in procedure:• The liquid temperature is stable.
• The liquid that flows through the device does not change. Or the liquid is still and the pipe is full and freeof bubbles.
During the calibration:• The device status indicator is orange, if the operating mode of the device status indicator is set
to NAMUR (ex-works setting, see chapter 12.4 Changing the operating mode of the device statusindicator or switching off the device status indicator).
• The NAMUR mode "function check" is active. The outputs react depending on your settings.
Instead of calibrating the offset value of the acoustic transmission factor, you can directly set it. See
chapter 17.19.

english271

Type 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – MaintenanceTo calibrate the offset value of the acoustic transmission factor, do the following:→ Make sure the liquid in the pipe is the liquid to be measured.
→ Charge the pipe. To avoid bubbles and air in the pipe, make sure it is full of liquid.
→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Calibration→

Add. meas. values→

Acoustic transmission factor→

Offset→Teach-in by reference→

Start the calibration of the offset value.

→→

The Current settings are displayed.

After 30 s, enter the acoustic transmission factor of the reference liquid.
New settings are displayed.
Save.
The offset value of the acoustic transmission factor is calibrated.

If the calibration fails, a message is displayed. Refer to chapter 24.10 Messages due to calibration or
simulation.

→

Acknowledge the message to go back to the parent menu.

272

englishThe

Type 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Maintenance

17.22

Setting the slope value of the acoustic transmission
factorTo enter a slope value for the acoustic transmission factor, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Calibration→

Add. meas. values→

Acoustic transmission factor

→

Slope

→

Enter value→→

Set the slope value.
Save.
The slope value of the acoustic transmission factor is set.

273

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Maintenance

17.23

Resetting all the calibration data to its default values(additional measurement values)

The calibration data that can be reset is:• the offset value of the DF,• the slope value of the DF,• the offset value of the liquid density,• the slope value of the liquid density,• the offset value of the acoustic transmision factor,• the slope value of the acoustic transmision factor.
To reset all the calibration data to its default values, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Calibration→

Add. meas. values→

Reset to default→

Confirm.
All the calibration data is reset to their default values.

→

Go back to the parent menu.

274

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Maintenance

17.24

Checking the correct behaviour of the device

The feature allows you to check if the device has the expected behaviour depending on the settings you
have made.
You can check the behaviour of the device:• by simulating one or several process values,• by simulating one or several events.

17.24.1 Choosing the process values to be simulated
The cut-off feature is not checked when simulating a flow rate value.
To check the behaviour by simulating a process value, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Simulation→

Meas. values→

Process value→

Choose one or several process values→

Values to simulate→

Choose a process value→

The previously selected process values are displayed.

Enter the value to be simulated
to Running and the value is being simulated.

The status of the simulation is automatically set→ Check if the device behaves depending on the settings you have made.
The simulation is active as long as the status Running is active. Thus, you can:• leave the menu to check if a measurement view shows the simulated value, or if the analogue
output associated to one of the simulated physical quantities gives out the correct current value (seechapter 20.2 Checking the correct operation of an analogue output).
• or simulate another value for the same process value and/or another process value,• or simulate one or several events.

→ To stop the simulation, see chapter 17.24.3 Stopping the simulation of process values and events.
275

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Maintenance17.24.2 Checking the behaviour of the device by simulating an event
The events Low flow cut off and Backward flow can only be tested by simulating a flow rate value.
See chapter 17.24.1.
To check the behaviour by simulating one or several events that are enabled on the device, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Simulation→

Status→Running→

Diag. events→

Choose Process or Electronic or Sensor→

Choose the events to be simulated→ Check if the device behaves depending on the settings you have made.
The simulation is active as long as the status Running is active. Thus, you can:• leave the menu to check if the simulated events have been generated (see chapter 16.8 Reading out thediagnostics events that occurred in the process, chapter 16.9 Reading out the diagnostics events that
occurred on the electronics and chapter 16.10 Reading out the diagnostics events that occurred on thesensor),• or simulate one or several events.

→ To stop the simulation, see chapter 17.24.3 Stopping the simulation of process values and events.

276

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
SAW sensor – Maintenance17.24.3 Stopping the simulation of process values and events
To stop the simulation of process values and events, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

SAW sensor→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Simulation→

Status→StoppedThe simulation is stopped.

277

englishType 8098 FLOWave L﻿278

englishType 8098 FLOWave L﻿Menu Outputs
18

OUTPUTS – PARAMETER...................................................................................................................280
18.1 Default settings.........................................................................................................................280
18.2 Changing the type of output 3..................................................................................................280
18.3 Setting the parameters of an analogue output........................................................................281
18.3.1

Changing the process value and the process value range associated toan analogue output...................................................................................................281

18.3.2Choosing the damping level of the values transmitted on an analogue output....282

18.3.3

Configuring the behaviour of an analogue output depending on thestatus of the device..................................................................................................283

18.4 Disabling an analogue output..................................................................................................284
18.5 Setting the parameters of a digital output ..............................................................................284
18.5.1

Configuring a digital output as an on/off output.....................................................285

18.5.2

Configuring a digital output as an output with switching thresholds....................286

18.5.3

Configuring a digital output as a frequency output................................................287

18.5.4

Configuring a digital output as a pulse output .......................................................288

18.6 Resetting all the parameters of an output to their default values..........................................290
18.7 Resetting all the parameters of all the outputs to their default values...................................290
19

OUTPUTS – DIAGNOSTICS................................................................................................................291
19.1 Analogue output: reading out the current status and the values of the current....................291
19.2 Digital output: reading out the mode, the current status and the current value....................291

20

OUTPUTS – MAINTENANCE...............................................................................................................292
20.1 Calibrating an analogue output................................................................................................292
20.2 Checking the correct operation of an analogue output..........................................................292
20.3 Resetting the calibration data of an analogue output to its default values...........................29320.4 Resetting the calibration data of all the analogue outputs to its default values....................29320.5 Checking the correct operation of an on/off output or a threshold output............................294
20.6 Checking the correct operation of a frequency output...........................................................294
20.7 Checking the correct operation of a pulse output..................................................................295

279

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Outputs – Parameter

18

OUTPUTS – PARAMETER
The output parameters can be set with the Installer user level.
Even if the menu Outputs is available on an Ethernet device variant, we recommend to not use theoutputs.

18.1

Default settings

You can find the default settings of the device in the CANopen supplement for the Type 8098 FLOWave L atcountry.burkert.com.

→ Before making any change in the settings, use the Bürkert Communicator software to print a pdf file withall the default settings of the device.

18.2

Changing the type of output 3

NOTICE
Risk of short-circuit if the configuration of output 3 is wrong.
▶ Before wiring output 3, make sure that output 3 is correctly configured.
By default, output 3 is configured as analog output, output 2 is configured with temperature as value.
To change the type of output 3, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Outputs→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Output 3 type→

Choose the type of the output 3.

→

Save.

.

The configuration and the name of output 3 are changed.

280

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Outputs – Parameter

18.3

Setting the parameters of an analogue output

By default, the device has 2 analogue outputs, Output 1:analog and Output 3:analog. You can change thetype of output 3: see chapter 18.2.
The following parameters can be set:
• the Process value associated to the analogue output.
• the value of the process variable which is associated to the 4 mA current of the analogue output.
• the value of the process variable which is associated to the 20 mA current of the analogue output.
• the Damping level of the values that are transmitted on the analogue output. By default, the values transmitted on the analogue output are not damped.
• the behaviour of the analogue output depending on the status of the device.
Table 40:

Default parameters of the 2 analogue outputs

Parameter

Default value

Process value associated to the analogue output• If option Mass flow and Density is activated:
Mass flow rate
• Else: Volume flow rate

4 mA value

0.0 l/min

20 mA value

Full scale of the flow rate measurement range. Valuedepends on the DN of the process connections.

Damping level

None

Behaviour if a Failure message is generated by thedevice22mA

Behaviour if an Out of spec. message is generated
by the device

Continue

Behaviour if a Maintenance req. message is
generated by the device

Continue

18.3.1

Changing the process value and the process value range
associated to an analogue output

To change the process value and the process value range associated to an analogue output, do thefollowing:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Outputs→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Output 1: analog or Output 3: analog→

Settings→

Choose a process value

The Current settings are displayed→

Set the value associated to a 4 mA current→

Set the value associated to a 20 mA current

The New settings are displayed.

english281

Type 8098 FLOWave L
Outputs – Parameter

→

Save.
The process value and the process value range associated to the analogue output are changed.

18.3.2Choosing the damping level of the values transmitted on an
analogue output

The following diagram shows the effect of the damping on the flow rate measurements.
Volume flow rate measurement

The set damping level for the volume
flow rate measurements is applied(see chapter 15.4.2)

The calculated volume
is used by the totalizers
and the pulse outputs.

If active, cut-off is applied.

The resulting volume
flow rate is displayed.

The set damping level for the analogue outputs is applied

The resulting volume flow rate value
is transmitted on the analogue
outputs
Fig. 66:

Effect of the damping on the flow rate measurements

When the damping is active (i.e. when a Low, Medium or High level has been set) and the values
vary for ±30 % (for example when charging the pipe or stopping the flow), the damping is notapplied to the new measured value.
Table 41:

Response times (10 %...90 %) of the damping levels

Damping level
None
Low
MediumHigh

282

englishResponse time
<1s
1s
10 s
30 s

Type 8098 FLOWave L
Outputs – Parameter

To change the damping level of the values transmitted on an analogue output, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Outputs→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Output 1: analog or Output 3: analog→

Damping→ Choose the damping level.
→

Save.
The damping level is changed.

18.3.3

Configuring the behaviour of an analogue output depending on
the status of the device

Depending on the status of the device, the analogue output:• can continue to transmit the process values.
• or, can transmit and hold the last process value. The choice is not available if measurements are
impossible.
• or, can transmit a 22 mA current. The choice is not available if measurements are impossible.
• or, can transmit a 3.6 mA current. The choice is not available if measurements are impossible.
• or, can transmit any preset current value (i.e. a Forced value).
To change the behaviour of an analogue output depending on the status of the device, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Outputs→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Output 1: analog or Output 3: analog→

Behaviour→Choose Impossible to measure or Failure or Out of spec. or Maintenance req.
The current behaviour is displayed→→→

Choose the behaviour associated to the device status.
If the behaviour is set to Forced value, then set the current value to any value in the range
3.5...23 mA.
Save.
The behaviour of an analogue output is changed.

283

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Outputs – Parameter

18.4

Disabling an analogue output

If an analogue output is not wired, the analogue output can be disabled to avoid the generation of theevents Output 1, open loop or Output 3, open loop.
To disable an analogue output, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Outputs→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Output 1 type or Output 3 type→

Disabled→

Save.
The analogue output is disabled.
The menus related to the analogue output are not displayed any more.

18.5

Setting the parameters of a digital output

By default, the device has 1 digital output, Output 2:digital, that is configured as a pulse output.
The output 3 can also be configured as a digital output: see chapter 18.2.
A digital output can be configured:• as an on/off output,• or, to switch depending on two threshold values,• or, as a frequency output,• or, as a pulse output.
Table 42:

Default parameters of the digital output

Parameter
Mode
Max. pulse timeMax. frequency
Pulse mode

Default value
Pulse
65 ms
2000 Hz• If the Mass flow option is notavailable on the device: Pulse/l• If Mass flow is activated on
Output 2:digital only: Pulse/kg

284

englishDN of process connections
all the diameters
all the diameters
all the diameters
all the diameters

Type 8098 FLOWave L
Outputs – Parameter

Parameter

Default value
4000 pulses per litre or kg
2000 pulses per litre or kg
500 pulses per litre or kg

250 pulses per litre or kg
Pulse/l

100 pulses per litre or kg

Pulse/kg

60 pulses per litre or kg

40 pulses per litre or kg
30 pulses per litre or kg
Inverted

18.5.1No

DN of process connections
3/8" ASME
1/2" ASME
DN08 ISOASME 3/4"
DN15 DIN
DN15 ISOASME 1"
DN25 DIN
DN25 ISOASME 1 1/2"
DN40 DIN
DN40 ISOASME 2"
SMS 50
DN50 DIN
DN50 ISOASME 2 1/2"
DN65 DIN
DN65 ISOASME 3"
DN80 DIN
DN80 ISO
all the diameters

Configuring a digital output as an on/off output

An on/off output switches every time the associated event is generated.
You can choose between the following events:• Failure• Function check• Out of spec.
• Maintenance req.
• any event activated in the menu SAW sensor – Parameter – Diagnostics – Process• any event activated in the menu SAW sensor – Parameter – Diagnostics – Electronic
To configure a digital output as an on/off output, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Outputs→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Output 2:digital or Output 3:digital

→

Mode
285

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Outputs – Parameter→

On/off→Settings→

Choose the events→

Choose to invert the switching or not (see Fig. 67 and Fig. 68)→

The Current settings are displayed

Set the value of the switching time delay→

The New settings are displayed.

Save.
The digital output is configured as an on/off output.

18.5.2

Configuring a digital output as an output with switching
thresholds

An output with switching thresholds switches depending on two threshold process values.
The output can switch either according to an hysteresis model or according to a window model.
Hysteresis switching
The output status changes when a threshold is reached:• by increasing values, the output state changes when the high threshold X+ is reached.
• by decreasing values, the output state changes when the low threshold X- is reached.
Contact

Not inverted

ON
OFF

X-

X+

process value

Contact

Inverted

ON
OFF

X- X+

process value

X- = low switching threshold
X+ = high switching threshold
Fig. 67:

Hysteresis switching

Window switching: the output state changes as soon as any threshold (X- or X+) is reached.
ContactON

Not inverted

OFF

X- X+
X- = low switching threshold
X+ = high switching threshold
Fig. 68:

Window switching286

englishprocess value

Contact
ON

Inverted

OFF

X- X+

process value

Type 8098 FLOWave L
Outputs – ParameterTo configure a digital output as an output with switching thresholds, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Outputs→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Output 2:digital or Output 3:digital

→

Mode

→

Threshold→Settings→

Choose the process value associated to the digital output→

Choose the hysteresis switching or the window switching of the digital output

The Current settings are displayed

If the high threshold is equal to the low threshold, the digital output is deactivated.

→

Set the value of the high threshold→

Set the value of the low threshold→

Choose to invert the switching or not→→

Set the value of the switching time delay

The New settings are displayed.

Save.
The digital output is configured to switch depending on 2 threshold values.

18.5.3

Configuring a digital output as a frequency output

A frequency output transmits a frequency signal which is proportional to the chosen process value.
To configure a digital output as a frequency output, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Outputs→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Output 2:digital or Output 3:digital

→

Mode

→

Frequency→

Settings

The Current settings are displayed287

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Outputs – Parameter→

Choose the process value associated to the digital output
If the high value is equal to the low value, the digital output is deactivated.

→

Set the high value of the frequency range→

Set the process value which is associated to the high value of the frequency range→

Set the low value of the frequency range→

Set the process value which is associated to the low value of the frequency range
The New settings are displayed.

→

Save.
The digital output is configured as a frequency output.

18.5.4

Configuring a digital output as a pulse output

When the digital output is configured as a pulse output, it transmits:• either a number of pulses proportional to the measured volume (pulse/volume),• or 1 pulse each time a set volume of liquid has been measured by the device (volume/pulse),• or a number of pulses proportional to the measured mass (pulse/mass),• or 1 pulse each time a set mass of liquid has been measured by the device (mass/pulse).
By default, the value of the parameter pulse/volume is set for the full scale of the flow-rate measurement range. Observe the following rules to adapt the value of the parameter pulse/volume toyour flow-rate measurement range:• Make sure that the maximum flow rate value (in litres per second) multiplied by the pulse per litre
value is lower than 2000 pulses per second. Pulses above the 2000 pulses/s limit are not transmitted immediately but are accumulated. The accumulated pulses are transmitted as a block
when the 2000 pulses/s limit is no longer exceeded.
• The pulse output of the device is connected to an input of another equipment, for example a PLC.
Take into account the frequency of the input, because it can be lower than the maximum pulse
frequency that you have set.
Calculation example for the number of pulses per volume:
Consider a device with DN40 ISO process connections. The following device data are needed:• Maximum measurable flow-rate at a liquid velocity of 10 m/s:
925 L/min→ Read the maximum flow-rate value in Outputs
Output 3: analog
Settings
report that is delivered with the device.

Parameter
Output 1: analog orCurrent settings
20 mA value or on the test

• Default number of pulses per volume unit:
100 pulses/volume unit

288

Data for your application with a maximum measurable flow-rate of 400 L/min = 6.6 L/s• Number of pulses per volume unit with a safety margin of 5 %, in order to not exceed 2000 Hz:(2000 – 5 % x 2000) / 6.6 L/s = 287 pulses/litre

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Outputs – ParameterTo configure a digital output as a pulse output, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Outputs→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Output 2:digital or Output 3:digital

→

Mode

→

Pulse

→

Settings→

EnabledThe Current settings are displayed→

Set the value of the maximum duration of a pulse→

Set the value of the maximum frequency for the transmission of the pulses

→
→
→

or

Choose pulse/volume or volume/pulse in the wanted volume units

Choose pulse/mass or mass/pulse in the wanted mass units
If you have chosen pulse/volume, set the number of pulses to be transmitted on the digital
output for either 1 litre or 1 US gallon or 1 imperial gallon. Enter a number of pulses that is higher than 1.
If you enter a number of pulses that is lower than 1, the display resolution is not optimum.

→

If you have chosen volume/pulse, set the volume of liquid for which 1 pulse is transmitted on
the digital output→

If you have chosen pulse/mass, set the number of pulses to be transmitted on the digital output
for either 1 g, 1 kg, 1 lb or 1 t. Enter a number of pulses that is higher than 1. If you enter a number ofpulses that is lower than 1, the display resolution is not optimum.

→

If you have chosen mass/pulse, set the mass of liquid for which 1 pulse is transmitted on thedigital output→

Choose to invert the signal or not→

Choose the counting direction

→

Save.

The New settings are displayed.

The digital output is configured as a pulse output.

289

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Outputs – Parameter

18.6

Resetting all the parameters of an output to theirdefault values

To reset all the parameters of an output to their default values, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Outputs→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Choose an output→

Reset to default→

To reset the parameters of the selected output→

To acknowledge the displayed message.

18.7

All the parameters of the output are reset.

Resetting all the parameters of all the outputs to theirdefault values

To reset all the parameters of all the outputs to their default values, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Outputs→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Reset to default→

To reset the parameters of all the outputs→

To acknowledge the displayed message.

290

englishThe parameters of all the outputs are reset.

Type 8098 FLOWave L
Outputs – Diagnostics

19

OUTPUTS – DIAGNOSTICS

19.1

Analogue output: reading out the current status andthe values of the current

Any user can read out the following data related to an analogue output:• the current status of the analogue output, i.e. OK, Open loop or Impedance too high.
• the value of the current related to the measured quantity of the process value,• the value of the current transmitted on the analogue output.
This data is in read-only mode. To read out some data related to an analogue output, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Outputs→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→

Choose the analogue output→ Read out the data related to the analogue output.
→

To go back to the parent menu.

19.2

Digital output: reading out the mode, the current
status and the current value

Any user can read out the following data related to a digital output:• the current mode, e.g. pulse, of the digital output,• the current status of the digital output, i.e. OK or Overload.
• the current value of the digital output, e.g. for a pulse output, the number of pulses transmitted on the output.
This data is in read-only mode. To read out some data related to a digital output, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Outputs→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→

Choose the digital output→ Read out the data related to the digital output.
→

291

To go back to the parent menu.

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Outputs – Maintenance

20

OUTPUTS – MAINTENANCE
The settings can be made with the Installer user level.

20.1

Calibrating an analogue output

The analogue outputs are calibrated at the factory.
To adjust the analogue output to your equipment, do the following:→ Connect a multimeter to the analogue output you want to adjust.
→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Outputs→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Output 1: analog or Output 3: analog→

Calibration
The Current settings are displayed
erates a 4 mA current on the chosen analogue output.

→Enter the current value measured by the multimeter
20 mA current on the chosen analogue output.

The device generates a→Enter the current value measured by the multimeter
displayed.

The New settings are→

The device gen-Save.
The analogue output is adjusted.

20.2

Checking the correct operation of an analogue
outputTo check the correct operation of an analogue output, do the following:→ Connect a multimeter to the analogue output you have adjusted.
→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Outputs→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Output 1: analog or Output 3: analog

292

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Outputs – Maintenance

→

Test

→ Enter the current value to be tested
the chosen analogue output.

→

To test another value or

20.3

The device generates the entered current value on

To quit the test.

Resetting the calibration data of an analogue output
to its default values

To reset the calibration data of an analogue output to its default values, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Outputs→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Output 1: analog or Output 3: analog→

Reset to default→

To reset the calibration data of an analogue output to its default values.

→

The calibration data of an analogue output is reset to its default values.

→

To acknowledge the displayed message.

20.4

Resetting the calibration data of all the analogue
outputs to its default values

To reset the calibration data of all the analogue outputs to its default values, do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Outputs→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Reset to default→

To reset the calibration data of all the analogue outputs to its default values.

→

The calibration data of all the analogue outputs is reset to its default values.

→

To acknowledge the displayed message.
293

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Outputs – Maintenance

20.5

Checking the correct operation of an on/off output ora threshold output

To check the correct operation of a digital output configured as an on/off output, do the following:→ Connect a multimeter to the digital output configured as an on/off output.
→ Energize the output.
→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Outputs→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Output 2: digital or Output 3: digital, configured as an on/off output or as a threshold output

→

Test

→

On or Off

Check if the output is operating correctly.

→

To test another state or

To quit the test.

20.6

Checking the correct operation of a frequency output

To check the correct operation of a digital output configured as a frequency output, do the following:→ Connect a frequency meter to the digital output configured as a frequency output.
→ Energize the output.
→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Outputs→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Output 2: digital or Output 3: digital, configured as a frequency output

→

Test

→

Enter a frequency value→

To test another value or294

englishCheck if the output is operating correctly.
To quit the test.

Type 8098 FLOWave L
Outputs – Maintenance

20.7

Checking the correct operation of a pulse output

To check the correct operation of a digital output configured as a pulse output, do the following:→ Connect a counter to the digital output configured as a pulse output.
→ Energize the output.
→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Outputs→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Output 2: digital or Output 3: digital, configured as a pulse output

→

Test

→

Enter a frequency value→→Enter a number of pulses
Check if the output is operating correctly. For example
through the correct flashing of the related LED on the transmitter board.
To test another number of pulses or

To stop the test and go back to the parent menu.

295

englishType 8098 FLOWave L﻿296

englishType 8098 FLOWave L﻿Menu Industrial Communication
21

MENU PARAMETER ...........................................................................................................................298
21.1 Default settings and information on configuration files..........................................................298
21.2 Industrial Protocol settings.......................................................................................................298

2221.2.1

Choosing the communication protocol...................................................................298

21.2.2

Reading out the MAC address of the device..........................................................298

21.2.3

Changing the static IP address................................................................................299

21.2.4

Changing the network mask....................................................................................299

21.2.5

Changing the address of the default gateway........................................................300

21.2.6

Reading out the IP address assigned by a DHCP..................................................300

21.2.7

Choosing the internal cycle time.............................................................................300

21.2.8Choosing the communication timeout and enabling it...........................................301

21.2.9Disabling the communication timeout.....................................................................301

MENU MAINTENANCE .......................................................................................................................302
22.1 Reading out the software version number...............................................................................302
22.2 Reading out the hardware version number.............................................................................302
22.3 Reading out the article number of the device.........................................................................302
22.4 Reading out the article number of the software......................................................................303
22.5 Reading out the serial number of the device...........................................................................303
22.6 Reading out stack information.................................................................................................303
22.7 Reading out the version of the industrial communication......................................................304
22.8 Restarting the current industrial communication....................................................................304
22.9 Resetting the industrial communication module.....................................................................305
22.10 Restoring the configuration file................................................................................................305

23

MENU DIAGNOSTICS ........................................................................................................................306
23.1 Reading out the active protocol and the internal cycle time..................................................306
23.2 Reading out the number of Ethernet connections..................................................................306
23.3 Reading out the internal temperature of the industrial communication module...................30723.4 Reading out the last status code.............................................................................................307

297

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Menu Parameter

21

MENU PARAMETERThe Industrial communication parameters can be set with the Installer user level.

The section describes the menus related to the industrial communication module which is fitted on thedevice.

21.1

Default settings and information on configuration files

You can find the default settings of the device and information on the configuration files in the Ethernet
industrial communication supplement for the Type 8098 FLOWave L at country.burkert.com.

→ Before making any change in the settings, use the Bürkert Communicator software to print a pdf file withall the default settings of the device.

21.2

Industrial Protocol settings

21.2.1

Choosing the communication protocol

Do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Industrial communication→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Protocol settings→

Protocol→Choose the communication protocol.

→

Save.
The gateway address is changed.

21.2.2

Reading out the MAC address of the device

You can read out the MAC address of the device. But be aware that the device uses 3 MAC addresses:− 1 for the device (which is marked on a specific label and which can be read out in the configurationmenu),− 1 for port X1 of the Industrial communication gateway (MAC address of the device plus 1),− 1 for port X2 of the Industrial communication gateway (MAC address of the device plus 2).

298

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Menu ParameterDo the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Industrial communication→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

IP settings→

Go back to the parent menu.

21.2.3

MAC address

Changing the static IP address

Do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Industrial communication→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

IP settings→

Static IP address→→

The current address is displayed.

Set the new address.
Save.
The static address is changed.

21.2.4

Changing the network mask

Do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Industrial communication→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

IP settings→

Network mask→→

The current network mask is displayed.

Set the new network mask.
Save.
The network mask is changed.

299

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Menu Parameter

21.2.5

Changing the address of the default gateway

Before commissioning the device, you must change the address of the gateway.
Do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Industrial communication→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

IP settings→

Default gateway→→

The current gateway address is displayed.

Set the new address of the gateway.
Save.
The address of the gateway is changed.

21.2.6

Reading out the IP address assigned by a DHCP

When the device is connected to a network that uses DHCP mode, a temporary IP address is automaticallyassigned to the device. You can read out this address.
Do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Industrial communication→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

IP settings→

Go back to the parent menu.

Temp. IP address

If the device is removed from the network and again connected to this network, another temporary IP
address is assigned to the device.

21.2.7

Choosing the internal cycle time

The internal cycle time is the refresh time of the data in the industrial communication module.
Do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Industrial communication→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Advanced settings

300

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Menu Parameter→

Internal cycle time→

Choose the value. You can choose between Auto cycle time and several values in milliseconds.

→

Save.
The internal cycle time is set.

21.2.8Choosing the communication timeout and enabling it

The feature is only available for the protocol Modbus TCP. If a Modbus TCP communication is stopped
because an Ethernet cable is disconnected, the disconnection will be recognized after the set timeout.
The timeout has no effect if the network master stops the communication.
Do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Industrial communication→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Advanced settings→

Communication Timeout→

Choose the value. You can choose between Auto cycle time and several values in milliseconds.

→

Save.

→ Restart the device.
The communication timeout is set and enabled.

21.2.9Disabling the communication timeout

Do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Industrial communication→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→

Advanced settings→

Communication Timeout→

DIsabled→

Save.
The timeout is disabled.
301

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Menu Maintenance

22

MENU MAINTENANCE

22.1

Reading out the software version number

Do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Industrial communication→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Version numbers→

Software version→

Go back to the parent menu.

22.2

Reading out the hardware version number

Do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Industrial communication→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Version numbers→

Hardware version→

Go back to the parent menu.

22.3

Reading out the article number of the device

Do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Industrial communication→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.

302→

Version numbers→

Ident. number→

Go back to the parent menu.

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Menu Maintenance

22.4

Reading out the article number of the software

Do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Industrial communication→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Version numbers→

Software ident. number→

Go back to the parent menu.

22.5

Reading out the serial number of the device

Do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Industrial communication→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Version numbers→

Serial number→

Go back to the parent menu.

22.6

Reading out stack information

Do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Industrial communication→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Version numbers→

Stack name or Stack version or Stack Build or Stack Revision or Stack Date→

Go back to the parent menu.
303

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Menu Maintenance

22.7

Reading out the version of the industrial
communication

Do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Industrial communication→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Version numbers→

Go back to the parent menu.

22.8

ICom Version

Restarting the current industrial communication

You can restart the current industrial communication between the device and the other network participants. During the restart, the communication between ports X1 and X2 is still possible.
Do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Industrial communication→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Reset device→

If you do not want to restart the current industrial communication but go back to the parent menu.

→

To restart the current industrial communication.

RestartThe current industrial communication has been restarted.

304

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Menu Maintenance

22.9

Resetting the industrial communication module

You can reset the industrial communication module without switching off the power supply. During thereset, the communication between ports X1 and X2 is not possible.
Do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Industrial communication→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Reset device→

Hardware reset of industrial communication→

If you do not want to reset the industrial communication module but go back to the parent menu.

→

To reset the industrial communication module. The device will restart.

The industrial communication module has been reset. The communication between ports X1 and X2 ispossible.

22.10 Restoring the configuration file
You can restore the configuration file with the PDO mapping from the device to the industrial communication module.
Do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Industrial communication→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the MAINTENANCE view.
→

Reset device→

Restore XML data→

If you do not want to restore the configuration file but go back to the parent menu.

→

To restore the configuration file. The device will restart.
The configuration file has been restored.

305

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Menu Diagnostics

23

MENU DIAGNOSTICS

23.1

Reading out the active protocol and the internal cycletime

Do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Industrial communication→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→

Protocol overview→

Go back to the parent menu.

23.2

Reading out the number of Ethernet connections

You can read out the number of Ethernet connections that have been established between the device andits clients. If the device has been disconnected from all its clients, the counter increments at the first Ethernet connection that is established with the device.
Do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Industrial communication→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→

Advanced→

Connections to PLC→

Go back to the parent menu.

306

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Menu Diagnostics

23.3

Reading out the internal temperature of the industrial
communication module

Do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Industrial communication→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→

Advanced→

Device temperature→

Go back to the parent menu.

23.4

Reading out the last status code

Do the following:→ Go to the CONFIGURATION view.
→

Industrial communication→

Confirm to access the Parameter view.

→ Go to the DIAGNOSTICS view.
→

Advanced→

Last status code→

Go back to the parent menu.

307

englishType 8098 FLOWave L﻿308

englishType 8098 FLOWave L﻿Troubleshooting, maintenance, transport, storage
24

MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING......................................................................................31224.1 Safety instructions....................................................................................................................312
24.2 Information on returning the device to the manufacturer or to the reseller...........................313
24.3 Cleaning the outer surface of the device.................................................................................313
24.4 Cleaning In Place (CIP) of the device.......................................................................................313
24.5 Sterilisation In Place (SIP) of the device..................................................................................314
24.6 Troubleshooting when no message is displayed....................................................................31524.7 Troubleshooting when a message is displayed.......................................................................31524.8 Messages when setting wrong parameters.............................................................................316
24.8.1

Kinematic viscosity ≤ 0. Check the flow viscosity compensation's parameters...316

24.9 Messages due to device internal diagnostics.........................................................................316
24.9.1

Message "Overvoltage detected"............................................................................316

24.9.2Message "Undervoltage detected".........................................................................317

24.9.3Message "Voltage is above the warning limit"........................................................317

24.9.4

Message "Voltage is below the warning limit"........................................................317

24.9.5

Message "Battery voltage is below the warning limit"...........................................318

24.9.6

Message "büS event: bus connection lost / not available"....................................318

24.9.7

Message "Overtemperature detected"....................................................................318

24.9.8Message "Undertemperature detected".................................................................319

24.9.9Message "Temperature is above the warning limit"...............................................319

24.9.10

Message "Temperature is below the warning limit"................................................319

24.9.11

Message "Internal message store overflow"..........................................................320

24.9.12

Message "No signals from interdigital transducer"................................................320

24.9.13

Message "No temperature sensor detected"..........................................................320

24.9.14

Message "Pipe characteristics have changed: check limits values".....................320

24.9.15

Message "Measure board is in boot starter mode, no firmware found n°1".........321

24.9.16

Message "Measured values cannot be used".........................................................321

24.9.17

Message "Communication between transmitter PCB and measurement
PCB has been interrupted n°x"................................................................................321

24.9.18

Message "The measurement board bootloader operation failed n° 1".................321

24.9.19

Message "An error occurred during communication"............................................322

24.9.20

Message "Max. flow rate"........................................................................................322
309

englishType 8098 FLOWave L﻿

24.9.21

Message "Max temperature"...................................................................................322

24.9.22

Message "Totalizer 1 stopped" / "Totalizer 2 stopped" or "Masstotalizer 1 stopped" / "Mass totalizer 2 stopped"...................................................322

24.9.23

Message "Totalizer 1 started" / "Totalizer 2 started" or "Mass totalizer 1
started" / "Mass totalizer 2 started"........................................................................323

24.10 Messages due to calibration or simulation..............................................................................323
24.10.1

Message "Calibration result out of range"..............................................................323

24.10.2

Message "Zero calibration cancelled, the flow rate is higher than 5 % offull scale" ..................................................................................................................323

24.10.3

Message "Calibration cancelled" ............................................................................324

24.10.4

Message "Calibration cancelled, the flow rate is less than 5 % of the fullscale" .......................................................................................................................324

24.10.5

Message "Resulting K factor is less than 0.8 or higher than 1.2" .........................324

24.10.6

Message "Resulting offset is higher than 10 °C, 18 °F" .........................................324

24.10.7

Message "Test mode activated"..............................................................................325

24.10.8

Message "Simulation mode active".........................................................................325

24.11 Messages due to the monitoring of process values...............................................................325
24.11.1

Message "Flow rate too high"..................................................................................325

24.11.2

Message "Flow rate too low"...................................................................................326

24.11.3

Message "Temperature too high"............................................................................326

24.11.4

Message "Temperature too low"..............................................................................327

24.11.5

Message "Value totalizer 1 too high" / "Value totalizer 2 too high" or "Value
mass totalizer 1 too high" / "Value mass totalizer 2 too high"...............................327

24.11.6

Message "Value totalizer 1 too low" / "Value totalizer 2 too low" or "Value
mass totalizer 1 too low" / "Value mass totalizer 2 too low"..................................328

24.11.7

Message "Fluid velocity too high"...........................................................................328

24.11.8

Message "Fluid velocity too low"............................................................................329

24.11.9

Message "DF too high"............................................................................................329

24.11.10 Message "DF too low"..............................................................................................330
24.11.11 Message "Acoustic transmission factor too high"..................................................330
24.11.12 Message "Acoustic transmission factor too low"...................................................331
24.11.13 Message "Density too high".....................................................................................331
24.11.14 Message "Density too low"......................................................................................332

310

englishType 8098 FLOWave L﻿24.12 Messages due to diagnostics events......................................................................................332
24.12.1

Message "Diagnostic is active"...............................................................................332

24.12.2

Message "Diagnostic is inactive"............................................................................332

24.12.3

Message "Not totally filled"......................................................................................333

24.12.4

Message "Liquid out of range"................................................................................333

24.12.5

Message "Unstable flow rate".................................................................................333

24.12.6

Message "Low flow cut off".....................................................................................334

24.12.7

Message "Change of liquid"....................................................................................334

24.12.8

Message "Backward flow".......................................................................................334

24.12.9

Message "Sound conductivity out of range"..........................................................335

24.12.10 Message "AO1 open loop" or "AO3 open loop".....................................................335
24.12.11 Message "AO1 Diag error" or "AO3 Diag error"......................................................335
24.12.12 Message "DO2 overload" or "DO3 overload".........................................................336
24.13 Messages due to the industrial communication module........................................................336
24.13.1

Message "No proper connection to the process control system".........................336

24.13.2

Message "Cyclic data transfer has been slower than configured timeout"..........337

24.13.3

Message "No or incorrect mapping file available"..................................................337

24.13.4

Message "Please select a protocol and restart the device"..................................337

24.13.5

Message "Master tried to plug wrong module or submodule"..............................337

24.13.6

Message "Initialization of industrial communication".............................................338

24.13.7

Message "Fieldbus master is running in stop mode".............................................338

25

SPARE PARTS AND ACCESSORIES..................................................................................................339

26

PACKAGING, TRANSPORT.................................................................................................................340

27

STORAGE............................................................................................................................................340

28

DISPOSAL OF THE DEVICE................................................................................................................340

311

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Maintenance and troubleshooting

24

MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

24.1

Safety instructions

Risk of injury due to electrical voltage.
▶ Before carrying out work on the system, disconnect the electrical power for all the conductors and isolate it.
▶ In accordance with standard UL/EN 61010-1, all equipment connected to the Type 8098 FLOWave L
flowmeter shall be double insulated with respect to the mains and all circuits connected to the Type 8098
FLOWave L flowmeter must be limited energy circuits.
▶ Observe all applicable accident protection and safety regulations for electrical equipment.
Risk of injury due to pressure in the installation.
▶ Before any intervention in the installation, stop the circulation of liquid, cut off the pressure and drain thepipe.
▶ Before any intervention in the installation, make sure there is no pressure in the pipe.
If switched on for a prolonged time, risk of burns or fire due to hot device surfaces▶ Do not touch with bare hands.
▶ Keep the device away from highly flammable substances and liquids.
Risk of burns due to high liquid temperatures.
▶ Do not touch with bare hands the parts of the device that are in contact with the liquid.
▶ Use safety gloves to handle the device.
▶ Before opening the pipe, stop the circulation of liquid and drain the pipe.
▶ Before opening the pipe, make sure the pipe is completely empty.
Risk of injury due to the nature of the liquid.
▶ Respect the prevailing regulations on accident prevention and safety relating to the use of dangerous
liquids.

WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-conforming maintenance.
▶ Maintenance must only be carried out by qualified and skilled staff with the appropriate tools.
▶ Ensure that the restart of the installation is controlled after any interventions.

CAUTION
Risk of injury due to a heavy device.
A heavy device can fall down during transport or during installation and cause injuries.
▶ Transport, install and dismantle a heavy device with the help of another person.
▶ Use appropriate tools.
312

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Maintenance and troubleshooting

24.2

Information on returning the device to the
manufacturer or to the reseller→ To return the device for calibration or any after sales service, use the original packaging.
→ Send the device back to your local Bürkert sales office. The addresses of our international sales offices
are available on the internet at country.burkert.com.

24.3

Cleaning the outer surface of the device• Always use a cleaning agent compatible with the materials from which the device is made.
• Pay special attention to the cable glands which are made of nickel plated brass.
The outer surface device can be cleaned with a cloth slightly dampened water or with a detergent compatible with the materials the device is made of.
Please feel free to contact your Bürkert supplier for any additional information.

24.4

Cleaning In Place (CIP) of the device

The measurement tube of the device can be cleaned in place in all the applications the device is used in.

→ Do the cleaning in place procedure at appropriate intervals to prevent malfunctions or contamination.
NOTICEThe device and the seals used on the process connections can be damaged by the cleaning agents or
the disinfecting agents.
▶ Use cleaning agents or disinfecting agents with a concentration that is compatible with the material themeasurement tube is made of.
▶ Check the chemical compatibility of the cleaning agents or disinfecting agents with the materials of theseals used on the process connections.
▶ For more information on the chemical compatibility and the cleaning temperatures contact your local
Bürkert sales office.
▶ Obey the cleaning in place procedure that is suited for your application.
Procedure for the cleaning in place of the device:→ Rinse the measurement tube with water of the best quality available in the factory (ideally, water for

injection or purified water) under the following conditions:− at a temperature between 50 °C and 75 °C,− at a flow velocity between 1.5 m/s and 2.1 m/s,
− for a duration that is determined by your CIP recipe.
→ Prepare one or two cleaning agents at concentrations and with chemical properties that have proven
their effectiveness on the residues to be removed. Make sure the concentration of the cleaning agent
does not damage stainless steel 316L.

→ Let the cleaning agent circulate through the measurement tube under the following conditions:− at a temperature between 50 °C and 75 °C,− at a flow velocity between 1.5 m/s and 2.1 m/s,
− for a duration that is determined by your CIP recipe.

313

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Maintenance and troubleshooting→ Rinse the measurement tube with water of the best quality available in the factory (ideally, water for
injection or purified water) under the same conditions as the first rinse.

→ If needed, let a second cleaning agent circulate through the measurement tube, under the same conditions as the first cleaning agent, to neutralize any alkaline residues that remain.

→ Do a final rinse of the measurement tube, under the same conditions as the first two rinses. Monitor the
conductivity value of the final rinse to make sure all the cleaning agents have been removed.

→ Blow air through the measurement tube to remove moisture and to ensure maintenance of a good
passive layer.

→ If needed, do a de-scaling by letting a solution made of water, nitric acid HNO3 [15 %...20 %] andhydrofluoric acid HF [2 %...5 %] at a temperature between 20 °C and 60 °C circulate through the measurement tube for 5...30 minutes.

→ After a de-scaling, or to prevent any corrosion effects after 1 or more (depending on the application)

CIP-procedures, do a passivation by letting a solution made of water and nitric acid HNO3 [3 %...5 %] at
a temperature between 70 °C and 80 °C circulate through the measurement tube for the same duration
as the CIP-procedure. Then, rinse the measurement tube with water with the best quality available in thefactory (ideally, water for injection or purified water) under the same conditions as the other rinses.

→ Blow air through the measurement tube to remove moisture and to ensure creation of a uniform passive
layer.

24.5

Sterilisation In Place (SIP) of the device

The measurement tube of the device can be sterilised in place in all the applications the device is used in.

→ Do the sterilisation in place procedure using dry saturated steam, temperature: 121 °C...140 °C, for max.
1 hour.

314

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Maintenance and troubleshooting

24.6

Troubleshooting when no message is displayed

Problem

The display is OFF

Possible cause

The device is not energized
1. Check the wiring.
2. Make sure that the voltage supply at the device terminals is
12...35 V DC. The actual value can be read in chapter 13.2.4.

What to do?

3. Check that the power supply source is working properly.

24.7

Troubleshooting when a message is displayed→ If the message displayed on your device is not explained in the Operating Instructions, contact Bürkert.
If a message has been generated:• a symbol is displayed in the information bar: see Table 43.
• Ex works and if the device status indicator is not switched off (see chapter 12.4.2 Switching off the device
status indicator), the device status indicator changes its colour and state based on the NAMUR NE 107
recommendation: see chapter 5.8.
• The message is displayed in a list called Messages overview. The list can be accessed via the context
menu. See chapter 10.7.3 Reading out the messages generated by the device.

Table 43:

SymbolDevice status symbols

StatusDescription

Failure, error or
fault• Malfunction,

Function check

Out ofspecification

Maintenancerequired• or monitored values in the error range.
Ongoing work on the device (for example, checking the correct
behaviour of the outputs by simulating measurement values); the output
signal is temporarily invalid (e.g. frozen).
The ambient conditions or process conditions for the device are outside
the permitted ranges.
Device internal diagnostics point to problems in the device or with theprocess properties.
The device is in controlled operation; however, the function is briefly
restricted.

→ Do the required maintenance operation.

315

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Maintenance and troubleshooting

24.8

Messages when setting wrong parameters24.8.1

Kinematic viscosity ≤ 0. Check the flow viscosity
compensation's parameters
Kinematic viscosity ≤ 0. Check the flow viscosity compensation's
parameters

Message
Symbol displayed in theinformation bar• When activating the compensation for a liquid with a constant viscosity,
you have entered a negative value of the viscosity. See chapter 15.14.2.

Possible cause• When activating the compensation for a liquid with a non-constant viscosity, the result of the entered equation is negative or equal to 0. See
chapter 15.14.3, 15.14.4, 15.14.5.
→ When activating the compensation for a liquid with a constant viscosity,
enter a positive value of the viscosity.

What to do?

→ When activating the compensation for a liquid with a non-constant viscosity, make sure the liquid temperature is in the range covered by theequation.

→ When activating the compensation for a liquid with a non-constant viscosity, make sure you have entered correct constant values.

24.9

Messages due to device internal diagnostics

24.9.1

Message "Overvoltage detected"

Message

Overvoltage detected

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
The supply voltage of the device is higher than or equal to the permitted
maximum error value. See chapter 12.7 Monitoring the device supply
voltage or the device temperature.
→ Energize the device with a 12...35 V DC voltage.

Possible cause
What to do?

As soon as the supply voltage value returns to within the permitted range,
the error is automatically reset.

316

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Maintenance and troubleshooting

24.9.2Message "Undervoltage detected"

Message

Undervoltage detected

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause
What to do?

The supply voltage of the device is lower than or equal to the permitted
minimum error value. See chapter 12.7 Monitoring the device supply voltage
or the device temperature.
→ Energize the device with a 12...35 V DC voltage.
As soon as the supply voltage value returns to within the permitted range,
the error is automatically reset.

24.9.3Message "Voltage is above the warning limit"

Message

Voltage is above the warning limit

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause
What to do?

The supply voltage of the device is higher than or equal to the permitted
maximum warning value set in chapter 12.7.2 Changing the 2 warning limit
values.
→ Energize the device with a 12...35 V DC voltage.
As soon as the supply voltage value returns to within the permitted range,
the warning is automatically reset.

24.9.4

Message "Voltage is below the warning limit"

Message

Voltage is below the warning limit

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause
What to do?

The supply voltage of the device is lower than or equal to the permitted
minimum warning value plus the hysteresis value, both set in chapter 12.7.2
Changing the 2 warning limit values.
→ Energize the device with a 12...35 V DC voltage.

→ If needed, change the limit value set in chapter 12.7.2.
As soon as the supply voltage value returns to within the permitted range,
the warning is automatically reset.

317

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Maintenance and troubleshooting

24.9.5

Message "Battery voltage is below the warning limit"

Message

Battery voltage is below the warning limit

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause

The voltage of the battery is under the low limit value. See chapter 12.8.

What to do?

The battery allows the internal clock to run for 7 days at ambient temperature when the power supply of the device is switched off or too low.
→ Energize the device with a 12...35 V DC voltage to load the battery.
As soon as the battery voltage value returns to within the permitted range,
the warning is automatically reset.

24.9.6

Message "büS event: bus connection lost / not available"
büS event: bus connection lost / not available

Message
Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause

The device is configured to send the measured process data to büS or to a
CANopen fieldbus but does not find any other network participant.

What to do?

→ Set the Bus mode to Standalone. See chapter 12.6.7.

24.9.7

Message "Overtemperature detected"

Message

Overtemperature detected

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
The internal temperature of the device is higher than the permitted
maximum error value (+85 °C). See chapter 12.7 Monitoring the device
supply voltage or the device temperature.
→ Make sure the internal temperature of the device is less than +85 °C.

Possible cause
What to do?

As soon as the internal temperature value returns to within the permitted
range, the error is automatically reset.

318

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Maintenance and troubleshooting

24.9.8Message "Undertemperature detected"

Message

Undertemperature detected

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause
What to do?

The internal temperature of the device is lower than the permitted minimum
error value (–40 °C). See chapter 12.7 Monitoring the device supply voltage
or the device temperature.
→ Make sure the internal temperature of the device is higher than –40 °C.
As soon as the internal temperature value returns to within the permitted
range, the error is automatically reset.

24.9.9Message "Temperature is above the warning limit"

Message

Temperature is above the warning limit

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause
What to do?

The internal temperature of the device is higher than the permitted
maximum warning value set in chapter 12.7.2 Changing the 2 warning limit
values.
→ Make sure the internal temperature of the device is less than the
maximum warning value.
As soon as the internal temperature value returns to within the permitted
range, the error is automatically reset.

24.9.10 Message "Temperature is below the warning limit"
Message

Temperature is below the warning limit

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause

The internal temperature of the device is lower than the permitted minimum
warning value set in chapter 12.7.2 Changing the 2 warning limit values.

What to do?

→ Make sure the internal temperature of the device is higher than theminimum warning value.

As soon as the internal temperature value returns to within the permitted
range, the error is automatically reset.

319

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Maintenance and troubleshooting

24.9.11 Message "Internal message store overflow"
Message

Internal message store overflow

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
The number of messages generated by the device is higher than thememory capacity.
→ Make sure the limits set for the monitoring of the process values arecorrect.

Possible cause
What to do?

24.9.12 Message "No signals from interdigital transducer"
Message

No signals from interdigital transducer

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar-

Possible cause

The sensor is not operating correctly.

What to do?

→ Send the complete device back to Bürkert because the sensor must be
replaced.

24.9.13 Message "No temperature sensor detected"
Message

No temperature sensor detected

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause

The temperature of the liquid can neither be measured nor compensated.

What to do?

→ If the temperature of the liquid must be measured, send the complete
device back to Bürkert because the sensor must be replaced.

24.9.14 Message "Pipe characteristics have changed: check limits
values"Message

Pipe characteristics have changed: check limits values

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause(symbol changed)
The transmitter has been associated with another sensor.

What to do?

→ Make sure all the settings related to the flow rate measurement are stillcorrect.

320

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Maintenance and troubleshooting

24.9.15 Message "Measure board is in boot starter mode, no firmware
found n°1"
Message

Measure board is in boot starter mode, no firmware found n°1

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause

The firmware of the measurement board is lost or is not valid.

What to do?

→ Start the device again.
→ If the error is still there, send the device back to Bürkert.

24.9.16 Message "Measured values cannot be used"
Message

Measured values cannot be used

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar-

Possible cause
What to do?

The device cannot measure the liquid parameters, for example, because
there are too many bubbles in the liquid or the sensor tube is not completely
filled.
→ Make sure there is no problem in the installation.

24.9.17 Message "Communication between transmitter PCB andmeasurement PCB has been interrupted n°x"
MessageCommunication between transmitter PCB and measurement PCB has beeninterrupted n°x

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause

There is no communication between the sensor and the transmitter.

What to do?

→ Make sure the cable connecting the sensor to the transmitter is notbroken and correctly plugged in. See chapter 7.3.1 Changing theposition of the transmitter on the sensor.

24.9.18 Message "The measurement board bootloader operation
failed n° 1"
Message

The measurement board bootloader operation failed n° 1

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause

During the firmware update, the sensor software could not be updated.

What to do?

→ Send the device back to Bürkert.

321

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Maintenance and troubleshooting

24.9.19 Message "An error occurred during communication"
Message

An error occurred during communication

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause

The flat cable that connects the sensor to the transmitter may be damaged.

What to do?

→ Make sure the flat cable is correctly connected.
→ If the cable is damaged, send the device back to Bürkert.

24.9.20 Message "Max. flow rate"
MessageMax. flow rate

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause(symbol not linked to a user setting)
The maximum flow rate is measured in the pipe. The flow rate in the tube ishigher than 10 m/s, whatever the DN of the tube.

What to do?

→ Make sure the flow rate value is less than 10 m/s.

24.9.21 Message "Max temperature"
Message

Max temperature

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause(symbol not linked to a user setting)
The temperature in the tube is higher than 150 °C. The maximum liquid temperature is measured in the pipe.
This message does not depend on the liquid temperature limits set by theuser.
→ Make sure the liquid temperature is in the permitted range.

What to do?

24.9.22 Message "Totalizer 1 stopped" / "Totalizer 2 stopped" or "Masstotalizer 1 stopped" / "Mass totalizer 2 stopped"
Totalizer 1 stopped / Totalizer 2 stopped

MessageorMass totalizer 1 stopped / Mass totalizer 2 stopped
Symbol displayed in theinformation bar-

Possible cause

The related totalizer / mass totalizer has been stopped by the user.

What to do?

→ If needed, start the totalizer / mass totalizer again.

322

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Maintenance and troubleshooting

24.9.23 Message "Totalizer 1 started" / "Totalizer 2 started" or "Masstotalizer 1 started" / "Mass totalizer 2 started"
Message

Totalizer 1 started / Totalizer 2 startedorMass totalizer 1 started / Mass totalizer 2 started

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar-

Possible cause

The related totalizer / mass totalizer has been started by the user.

What to do?

-

24.10 Messages due to calibration or simulation
24.10.1 Message "Calibration result out of range"
Message
Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause

Calibration result out of range(symbol changed)
The calibration has failed. The calibration has failed because of 1 of the possible causes:• An event such as Change of liquid or Sound cond. out of range has
been generated during the calibration.
• The calculated offset of the DF is lower than 0.5 or higher than 2.

What to do?

• The calculated offset of the acoustic transmission factor is lower than 0.5
or higher than 2.
→ Make sure the liquid is the same during the calibration procedure.

→ Make sure the conditions are met to measure the flow rate correctly.
→ Do a new calibration.
24.10.2 Message "Zero calibration cancelled, the flow rate is higher
than 5 % of full scale"MessageZero calibration cancelled, the flow rate is higher than 5 % of full scale

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause
What to do?

The calibration has failed because the flow rate is less than 5 % of the fullscale.
→ Make sure the flow is stopped in the pipe.

→ Do a new calibration.
323

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Maintenance and troubleshooting

24.10.3 Message "Calibration cancelled"
Message

Calibration cancelled

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
The user has interrupted a calibration of the zero flow, before the waitingtime of 30 seconds has elapsed.
→ Do a new calibration and observe the given instructions.

Possible cause
What to do?

24.10.4 Message "Calibration cancelled, the flow rate is less than 5 %of the full scale"Message

Calibration cancelled, the flow rate is less than 5 % of the full scale

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause

The calibration has failed because the flow rate is less than 5 % of the fullscale.

What to do?

→ Make sure the flow rate is higher than 5 % of the full scale.
→ Do a new calibration.

24.10.5 Message "Resulting K factor is less than 0.8 or higher than
1.2"
Message

Resulting K factor is less than 0.8 or higher than 1.2

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
When calibrating the K factor by using a teach-in procedure dependingon the flow rate or depending on a known volume, you have entered a reference value that varies for ±20 % from the measured value.
→ Do a new calibration.

Possible cause
What to do?

→ Enter a correct reference value.
24.10.6 Message "Resulting offset is higher than 10 °C, 18 °F"
Message

Resulting offset is higher than 10 °C, 18 °F

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause

When calibrating the offset value of the liquid temperature, you have entereda reference value that varies for ±10 °C (18 °F) from the measured value.

What to do?

→ Do a new calibration.
→ Enter a correct reference value.

324

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Maintenance and troubleshooting

24.10.7 Message "Test mode activated"
Message

Test mode activatedSymbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause

The test of an output has been started by the user.

What to do?

→ If needed, complete the test.

24.10.8 Message "Simulation mode active"
Message

Simulation mode active

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause

A measurement value is being simulated.

What to do?

→ As soon as the simulation is completed, the message is reset.

24.11

Messages due to the monitoring of process values

24.11.1

Message "Flow rate too high"Message

Flow rate too highSymbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause
What to do?

Message

The flow rate value is higher than the permitted maximum error value set
in chapter 15.4.7 Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the volume flow rate
As soon as the flow rate returns to within the permitted range, the error is
automatically reset.
Flow rate too highSymbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause
What to do?

The flow rate value is higher than the permitted maximum warning value set
in chapter 15.4.7 Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the volume flow rate
As soon as the flow rate returns to within the permitted range, the warning is
automatically reset.

325

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Maintenance and troubleshooting

24.11.2 Message "Flow rate too low"
Flow rate too low

Message
Symbol displayed in theinformation bar

The flow rate value is lower than the permitted minimum error value set inchapter 15.4.7 Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the volume flow rate
As soon as the flow rate returns to within the permitted range, the error is
automatically reset.

Possible cause
What to do?

Flow rate too low

Message
Symbol displayed in theinformation bar

The flow rate value is lower than the permitted minimum warning value set
in chapter 15.4.7 Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the volume flow rate
As soon as the flow rate returns to within the permitted range, the warning is
automatically reset.

Possible cause
What to do?

24.11.3 Message "Temperature too high"Temperature too highMessage
Symbol displayed in theinformation bar

The value of the liquid temperature is higher than the permitted maximum
error value set in chapter 15.6.7 Changing the error limits, the warning limits
and the hysteresis of the liquid temperature.
As soon as the flow rate returns to within the permitted range, the error is
automatically reset.

Possible cause
What to do?

Temperature too highMessage
Symbol displayed in theinformation bar

The value of the liquid temperature is higher than the permitted maximum
warning value set in chapter 15.6.7 Changing the error limits, the warning
limits and the hysteresis of the liquid temperature.
As soon as the flow rate returns to within the permitted range, the warning is
automatically reset.

Possible cause
What to do?

326

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Maintenance and troubleshooting

24.11.4 Message "Temperature too low"
Message

Temperature too low

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause
What to do?

Message

The value of the liquid temperature is lower than the permitted minimum
error value set in chapter 15.6.7 Changing the error limits, the warning limits
and the hysteresis of the liquid temperature.
As soon as the value of the liquid temperature returns to within the permitted range, the error is automatically reset.
Temperature too low

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause
What to do?

The value of the liquid temperature is lower than the permitted minimum
warning value set in chapter 15.6.7 Changing the error limits, the warning
limits and the hysteresis of the liquid temperature.
As soon as the value of the liquid temperature returns to within the permitted range, the warning is automatically reset.

24.11.5 Message "Value totalizer 1 too high" / "Value totalizer 2 too high"or "Value mass totalizer 1 too high" / "Value mass totalizer 2
too high"
Message

Value totalizer 1 too high / Value totalizer 2 too highor
Value mass totalizer 1 too high / Value mass totalizer 2 too highSymbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause
What to do?
Message

The value of the totalizer / mass totalizer is higher than the permitted
maximum error value set in chapter 15.9.5 Changing the error limits, thewarning limits and the hysteresis of each volume totalizer.
As soon as the value of the totalizer / mass totalizer returns to within thepermitted range, the error is automatically reset.
Value totalizer 1 too high / Value totalizer 2 too highor
Value mass totalizer 1 too high / Value mass totalizer 2 too highSymbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause
What to do?

The value of the totalizer / mass totalizer is higher than the permitted
maximum warning value set in chapter 15.9.5 Changing the error limits, thewarning limits and the hysteresis of each volume totalizer.
As soon as the value of the totalizer / mass totalizer returns to within thepermitted range, the warning is automatically reset.

327

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Maintenance and troubleshooting

24.11.6 Message "Value totalizer 1 too low" / "Value totalizer 2 too low"or "Value mass totalizer 1 too low" / "Value mass totalizer 2 too
low"
Message

Value totalizer 1 too low / Value totalizer 2 too low
orValue mass totalizer 1 too low / Value mass totalizer 2 too low

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
The value of the totalizer / mass totalizer is lower than the permitted
minimum error value set in chapter 15.9.5 Changing the error limits, thewarning limits and the hysteresis of each volume totalizer.
As soon as the value of the totalizer / mass totalizer returns to within thepermitted range, the error is automatically reset.

Possible cause
What to do?

Value totalizer 1 too low / Value totalizer 2 too low

MessageorValue mass totalizer 1 too low / Value mass totalizer 2 too low
Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
The value of the totalizer / mass totalizer is lower than the permitted
minimum warning value set in chapter 15.9.5 Changing the error limits, thewarning limits and the hysteresis of each volume totalizer.
As soon as the value of the totalizer / mass totalizer returns to within thepermitted range, the warning is automatically reset.

Possible cause
What to do?

24.11.7 Message "Fluid velocity too high"Message

Fluid velocity too highSymbol displayed in theinformation bar
The value of the liquid velocity is higher than the permitted maximum error
value set in chapter 15.7.7 Changing the error limits, the warning limits andthe hysteresis of the liquid velocity.
As soon as the value of the liquid velocity returns to within the permitted
range, the error is automatically reset.

Possible cause
What to do?

Fluid velocity too highMessage
Symbol displayed in theinformation bar

The value of the liquid velocity is higher than the permitted maximum
warning value set in chapter 15.7.7 Changing the error limits, the warning
limits and the hysteresis of the liquid velocity.
As soon as the value of the liquid velocity returns to within the permitted
range, the warning is automatically reset.

Possible cause
What to do?

328

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Maintenance and troubleshooting

24.11.8 Message "Fluid velocity too low"
Message

Fluid velocity too low

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause
What to do?

Message

The value of the liquid velocity is lower than the permitted minimum error
value set in chapter 15.7.7 Changing the error limits, the warning limits andthe hysteresis of the liquid velocity.
As soon as the value of the liquid velocity returns to within the permitted
range, the error is automatically reset.
Fluid velocity too low

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause
What to do?

The value of the liquid velocity is lower than the permitted minimum warning
value set in chapter 15.7.7 Changing the error limits, the warning limits andthe hysteresis of the liquid velocity.
As soon as the value of the liquid velocity returns to within the permitted
range, the warning is automatically reset.

24.11.9 Message "DF too high"Message

DF too highSymbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause
What to do?

Message

The value of the DF is higher than the permitted maximum error value set
in chapter 15.11.8 Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the differentiation factor.
As soon as the value of the DF returns to within the permitted range, theerror is automatically reset.
DF too highSymbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause
What to do?

The value of the DF is higher than the permitted maximum warning value set
in chapter 15.11.8 Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the differentiation factor.
As soon as the value of the DF returns to within the permitted range, thewarning is automatically reset.

329

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Maintenance and troubleshooting

24.11.10 Message "DF too low"
Message

DF too low

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
The value of the DF is lower than the permitted minimum error value set inchapter 15.11.8 Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the differentiation factor.
As soon as the value of the DF returns to within the permitted range, theerror is automatically reset.

Possible cause

What to do?

DF too low

Message
Symbol displayed in theinformation bar

The value of the DF is lower than the permitted minimum warning value set
in chapter 15.11.8 Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the differentiation factor.
As soon as the value of the DF returns to within the permitted range, thewarning is automatically reset.

Possible cause
What to do?

24.11.11 Message "Acoustic transmission factor too high"MessageAcoustic transmission factor too highSymbol displayed in theinformation bar
The value of the acoustic transmission factor is higher than the permitted
maximum error value set in chapter 15.12.6 Changing the error limits, thewarning limits and the hysteresis of the acoustic transmission factor.
As soon as the value of the acoustic transmission factor returns to within
the permitted range, the error is automatically reset.

Possible cause
What to do?

Acoustic transmission factor too highMessage
Symbol displayed in theinformation bar

The value of the acoustic transmission factor is higher than the permitted
maximum warning value set in chapter 15.12.6 Changing the error limits, thewarning limits and the hysteresis of the acoustic transmission factor.
As soon as the value of the acoustic transmission factor returns to within
the permitted range, the warning is automatically reset.

Possible cause
What to do?

330

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Maintenance and troubleshooting

24.11.12 Message "Acoustic transmission factor too low"
MessageAcoustic transmission factor too low

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause

What to do?

Message

The value of the acoustic transmission factor is lower than the permitted
minimum error value set in chapter 15.12.6 Changing the error limits, thewarning limits and the hysteresis of the acoustic transmission factor.
As soon as the value of the acoustic transmission factor returns to within
the permitted range, the error is automatically reset.
Acoustic transmission factor too low

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause
What to do?

The value of the acoustic transmission factor is lower than the permitted
minimum warning value set in chapter 15.12.6 Changing the error limits, thewarning limits and the hysteresis of the acoustic transmission factor.
As soon as the value of the acoustic transmission factor returns to within
the permitted range, the warning is automatically reset.

24.11.13 Message "Density too high"Message

Density too highSymbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause
What to do?

Message

The value of the density is higher than the permitted maximum error value
set in chapter 15.8.7 Changing the error limits, the warning limits and thehysteresis of the liquid density.
As soon as the value of the density returns to within the permitted range,
the error is automatically reset.
Density too highSymbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause
What to do?

The value of the density is higher than the permitted maximum warning
value set in chapter 15.8.7 Changing the error limits, the warning limits andthe hysteresis of the liquid density.
As soon as the value of the density returns to within the permitted range,
the warning is automatically reset.

331

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Maintenance and troubleshooting

24.11.14 Message "Density too low"
Message

Density too low

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
The value of the density is lower than the permitted minimum error value set
in chapter 15.8.7 Changing the error limits, the warning limits and the hysteresis of the liquid density.
As soon as the value of the density returns to within the permitted range,
the error is automatically reset.

Possible cause

What to do?

Density too low

Message
Symbol displayed in theinformation bar

The value of the density is lower than the permitted minimum warning value
set in chapter 15.8.7 Changing the error limits, the warning limits and thehysteresis of the liquid density.
As soon as the value of the density returns to within the permitted range,
the warning is automatically reset.

Possible cause
What to do?

24.12 Messages due to diagnostics events
24.12.1 Message "Diagnostic is active"
Message

Diagnostic is active

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
All the diagnostics are active on the device. See chapter 15.13 Diagnostics:
monitoring special events that occur in the process, on the sensor or on theelectronics.
-

Possible cause
What to do?

24.12.2 Message "Diagnostic is inactive"
Message

Diagnostic is inactive

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar

All the diagnostics are inactive on the device. See chapter 15.13 Diagnostics: monitoring special events that occur in the process, on the sensor
or on the electronics.
-

Possible cause
What to do?

332

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Maintenance and troubleshooting

24.12.3 Message "Not totally filled"
Message

Not totally filled

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar

Depends on the device status the event is associated to.

Possible cause

The calibration has failed. The calibration has failed because of one of thepossible causes:• The sensor may be broken (valid for product variants with DN08).

What to do?

• The tube is not totally filled. Thus not all the sensors are in contact withthe liquid and measurement is not possible. The related event must be
enabled. See chapter 15.13 Diagnostics: monitoring special events that
occur in the process, on the sensor or on the electronics.
→ Make sure the measurement tube is completely filled, for example byincreasing the flow rate.

→ If the message No signals from interdigital transducer is generated
simutaneously, then send the product back to Bürkert.

→ If the message Not totally filled remains, then send the product back to
Bürkert.

24.12.4 Message "Liquid out of range"
Message

Liquid out of range

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar

Depends on the device status the event is associated to.

Possible cause

The speed of sound in the liquid is out of range.
The related event must be enabled. See chapter 15.13 Diagnostics: monitoring special events that occur in the process, on the sensor or on theelectronics.

What to do?

The density in the liquid is out of range.
→ Make sure the liquid in the pipe meets the technical specifications givenin the data sheet for the device and in chapter 6 Technical data.

24.12.5 Message "Unstable flow rate"
Message

Unstable flow rate

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar

Depends on the device status the event is associated to.

Possible cause

What to do?

The flow rate is not stable. The standard deviation of the flow rate measurements is too high.
The related event must be enabled. See chapter 15.13 Diagnostics: monitoring special events that occur in the process, on the sensor or on theelectronics.
→ Make sure the operation of the equipment in the process, such as
pumps and process valves, is correct.
333

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Maintenance and troubleshooting

24.12.6 Message "Low flow cut off"
MessageLow flow cut off

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar

Depends on the device status the event is associated to.

Possible cause

The cut-off value of the flow rate has been used.
The cut-off function must be enabled. See chapter 15.4.9 Enabling the
cut-off function of the volume flow rate.
The related event must be enabled. See chapter 15.13 Diagnostics: monitoring special events that occur in the process, on the sensor or on theelectronics.
→ If necessary, increase the flow rate value until it is higher than the cut-off
value.

What to do?

24.12.7 Message "Change of liquid"
MessageChange of liquid

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar

Depends on the device status the event is associated to.

Possible cause

A different liquid flows in the pipe.
The message is active for 10 s on the display.
The related event must be enabled. See chapter 15.13 Diagnostics: monitoring special events that occur in the process, on the sensor or on theelectronics.
→ Make sure the liquid flowing in the pipe is the correct one.

What to do?

24.12.8 Message "Backward flow"
Message

Backward flow

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar

Depends on the device status the event is associated to.
The liquid flows in the opposite direction as the one set in chapter 17.4
Setting the direction of the flow.

Possible cause

The related event must be enabled. See chapter 15.13 Diagnostics: monitoring special events that occur in the process, on the sensor or on theelectronics.
→ Make sure the liquid flows in the correct direction.

What to do?

334

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Maintenance and troubleshooting

24.12.9 Message "Sound conductivity out of range"
MessageSound conductivity out of range

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar

Depends on the device status the event is associated to.

Possible cause

There are gas bubbles or solid particles in the liquid.

What to do?

The related event must be enabled. See chapter 15.13 Diagnostics: monitoring special events that occur in the process, on the sensor or on theelectronics.
→ Search for malfunctions in the process.

→ Make sure the liquid has no gas bubbles and no solid particles.
24.12.10 Message "AO1 open loop" or "AO3 open loop"
Message

AO1 open loopor
AO3 open loop

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar

Depends on the device status the event is associated to.

Possible cause

There is a connection problem on the related output.
The current measured in the current loop is too low compared to the
expected output current.

What to do?

The related event must be enabled. See chapter 15.13 Diagnostics: monitoring special events that occur in the process, on the sensor or on theelectronics.
→ Make sure the wiring of the related output is correct.

24.12.11 Message "AO1 Diag error" or "AO3 Diag error"
Message

AO1 Diag erroror
AO3 Diag error

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause

What to do?

Depends on the device status the event is associated to.
There is a connection problem on the related output or a high resistance is
detected in the loop.
The related event must be enabled. See chapter 15.13 Diagnostics: monitoring special events that occur in the process, on the sensor or on theelectronics.
→ Make sure all the cables are correctly connected.

→ If the related analogue output is not used, disable it. See chapter 18.4
Disabling an analogue output.

335

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Maintenance and troubleshooting

24.12.12 Message "DO2 overload" or "DO3 overload"
DO2 overload

Messageor
DO3 overload
Symbol displayed in theinformation bar

Depends on the device status the event is associated to.
An overload has been detected at the related digital output. A current higher
than 700 mA has been detected at the related digital output.

Possible cause

The output has switched.
The related event must be enabled. See chapter 15.13 Diagnostics: monitoring special events that occur in the process, on the sensor or on theelectronics.
→ Make sure all the cables are correctly connected.

What to do?

→ Make sure the current flowing through the related digital output is lessthan 700 mA.

24.13 Messages due to the industrial communication
module24.13.1 Message "No proper connection to the process control
system"Message

No proper connection to the process control system

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
There is no physical connection between the device and the control unit
(e.g. a PLC) or no communication is established between the device and thecontrol unit.
→ Make sure all the cables are correctly connected.

Possible cause

What to do?

→ Make sure the industrial communication settings are correct at thedevice and at the control unit (e.g. IP address).

336

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Maintenance and troubleshooting

24.13.2 Message "Cyclic data transfer has been slower thanconfigured timeout"
Message

Cyclic data transfer has been slower than configured timeout

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause

The parameter Communication Timeout is not correctly parametered.

What to do?

→ Set a higher time-out value. Refer to chapter 21.2.8 Choosing the com-(timeout should be written without upper case t in the menu point)munication timeout and enabling it.

24.13.3 Message "No or incorrect mapping file available"
MessageNo or incorrect mapping file available

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause

The device has no internal mapping file or the mapping file cannot be found.

What to do?

→ Contact the Bürkert service.

24.13.4 Message "Please select a protocol and restart the device"
Message

Please select a protocol and restart the device

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause

No valid protocol has been set on the device.

What to do?

→ If the device is connected to an industrial network, set the correct protocol. Refer to chapter 21.2.1 Choosing the communication protocol.

→ Restart the device.
24.13.5 Message "Master tried to plug wrong module or submodule"
Message

Master tried to plug wrong module or submodule

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause
What to do?

The PROFINET GSDML file does not match with the Ethernet module of thedevice.
→ Make sure that the correct GSDML file is used.

→ Make sure the device is correctly configured at the PLC.
337

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Maintenance and troubleshooting

24.13.6 Message "Initialization of industrial communication"
Message

Initialization of industrial communication

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
Possible cause

The device is initializing the industrial communication. The message is displayed at each device start.

What to do?

→ Wait until the initialization is finished.
→ If the message is not automatically removed, make sure the industrial

communication settings are correct at the device and at the PLC (e.g. IP
address).

24.13.7 Message "Fieldbus master is running in stop mode"
Message

Fieldbus master is running in stop mode

Symbol displayed in theinformation bar
The Ethernet connection is established with the client (e.g. PLC) but the PLC
is in stop mode.

Possible cause

No cyclic data can be sent to the PLC.
→ To send cyclic data to the PLC, start the PLC in RUN mode.

What to do?

338

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Spare parts and accessories

25

SPARE PARTS AND ACCESSORIESCAUTION

Risk of injury and/or damage caused by the use of unsuitable parts.
Incorrect accessories and unsuitable replacement parts may cause injuries and damage the device andthe surrounding area.
▶ Use only original accessories and original replacement parts from Bürkert.
Spare part or accessory
Unlocking magnetic key
5-pin M12 female and 5-pin M12 malestraight cable plugs, moulded at each end of
a 1 m shielded cable
5-pin M12 female and 5-pin M12 malestraight cable plugs, moulded at each end of
a 3 m shielded cable
Female M12 connector with a 120 Ω termination resistor
Y plug adapter for the male M12 connector
büS cable, 50 m
büS cable, 100 m

Article number
690309772404772405772424772420772413772414USB-büS interface set

772426339

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Packaging, Transport

26

PACKAGING, TRANSPORTCAUTION

Risk of injury due to a heavy device.
A heavy device can fall down during transport or during installation and cause injuries.
▶ Transport, install and dismantle a heavy device with the help of another person.
▶ Use appropriate tools.

NOTICE
Damage due to transport
Transport may damage an insufficiently protected device.
▶ Transport the device in shock-resistant packaging and away from humidity and dirt.
▶ Do not expose the device to temperatures that may exceed the admissible storage temperature range.
▶ Protect the electrical interfaces using protective plugs.

27

STORAGECAUTION

Risk of injury due to a heavy device.
A heavy device can fall down during transport or during installation and cause injuries.
▶ Transport, install and dismantle a heavy device with the help of another person.
▶ Use appropriate tools.

NOTICE
Poor storage can damage the device.
▶ Store the device in a dry place away from dust.
▶ Storage temperature of the device: –20 °C...+70 °C.

28

DISPOSAL OF THE DEVICE

Environmentally friendly disposal▶ Follow national regulations regarding disposal and the environment.
▶ Collect electrical and electronic devices separately and dispose of them as special waste.
Further information: country.burkert.com.

340

englishOﬀsetDensitySlope
DensityDensity
damping

K-Factor

DensityX

Mass ﬂow
damping

Volumeﬂow
damping

Mass ﬂow
cutoﬀ

Volumeﬂow cutoﬀ

Mass ﬂow

Counting
direction ofmass tot 2Counting
direction ofmass tot 1

Counting
direction of
volume tot 2

Overview of user parameters affecting FLOWave measurements
Masstotalizer 2

Masstotalizer 1

Volumetotalizer 2

Fig. 69:dacoeﬃcientOﬀset Volume
ﬂow

VolumeFlow

APPENDIX

Viscosity

Volumeﬂow raw

Volumetotalizer 1

29

Density raw

Refreshtime mode

Counting
direction of
volume tot 1

Type 8098 FLOWave L
Appendix

Appendix341

englishType 8098 FLOWave L
Appendix342

englishwww.burkert.com